dgpman

g

GEK-100666A

� Multilin

GE POWER MANAGEMENT

Digital Generator Protection TM System

GEK-100666A(Supersedes GEK-100605A)

DGP™Digital Generator Protection System

For Models :DGP***AAA; PROM Version V004.*****F,DGP***ABA; PROM Version V005.*****G,DGP***ACA; PROM Version V200.*****D

� MULTILINGE Power Management

These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equip-ment nor provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection withinstallation, operation, or maintenance. Should further information be de-sired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently forthe purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the General ElectricCompany.

To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable ANSI,IEEE, and NEMA standards; but no such assurance is given with respect tolocal codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.

Table of Contents GEK-100666

Getting Started ............................................................................................. 1

Chapter 1 Product Description ...................................................................1-1

Chapter 2 Calculation of Settings ...............................................................2-1

Chapter 3 Hardware Description ................................................................3-1

Chapter 4 Acceptance Tests ........................................................................4-1

Chapter 5 Periodic Tests .............................................................................5-1

Chapter 6 Servicing .....................................................................................6-1

Chapter 7 Specifications..............................................................................7-1

Chapter 8 Interface......................................................................................8-1

Chapter 9 DGP-LINK Software ....................................................................9-1

GEK-100666 Getting Started

1

GETTING STARTED

1. Unpack and examine the relay according to theinstructions in the HARDWARE DESCRIPTIONsection of this manual.

2. Prior to applying power, make sure each moduleis properly seated in the relay.

Apply rated DC power to the relay at the powersupply input terminals. Refer to the appropriateElementary Diagram shown at the end of thePRODUCT DESCRIPTION section (Fig. 1-6through 1-9) for the location of these terminals.

The rated DC value (Vps) for the relay is foundon the nameplate located inside the front coveron the right side.

3. The relay’s settings and control functions areprotected by passwords on both MMI and remoteaccess. The relay is shipped with the factory de-fault passwords which must be changed beforeany setting change or control command can beexecuted. The default passwords are listed belowas well as under Passwords in INTERFACE Sec-tion.

Factory default passwords:

MMI - SETTING 1234.MMI - CONTROL 5678.

REMOTE LINK - VIEW VIEW!REMOTE LINK - SETTING SETT!REMOTE LINK - CONTROL CTRL!

Note that the “.” & “!” are part of the defaultpasswords.

4. Instructions on how to use the keypad to changesettings and put the relay into test mode, can befound in the ACCEPTANCE TESTS section un-der "SETTING CHANGES." Complete instruc-tions on how to operate the keypad are found inthe INTERFACE section under "LOCAL MANMACHINE INTERFACE (MMI) OPERATION."

5. To communicate with the relay from a PC, con-nect the relay to a serial port of an IBM compati-ble computer with a DGP null-modem cable.Connection can be made either to the 25 pin D-connector on the back of the relay (PL-1), or the9 pin D-connector on the front (COM).

Refer to Figure 8-4 in the INTERFACE section forthe internal wiring of the cable.

6. The communications software, DGP-LINK, re-quired to access the relay from a PC is includedon the diskette in the plastic pocket at the back ofthis manual. Follow instructions in theSOFTWARE section under "Installation" to loadDGP-LINK onto the PC.

7. To log into the relay, follow the instructions inthe ACCEPTANCE TEST section under "UsingDGP-LINK."

8. This instruction book describes functions avail-able in DGP models with standard functiongroups A, B, and C. Refer to the NomenclatureSelection Guide shown below to determine func-tions included in a specific model.

GEK-100666 Getting Started

2

NOMENCLATURE SELECTION GUIDE

DGP * * * A * *1 1 Amp rated5 5 Amp rated

0 One power supply, 48 vdc1 One power supply, 110-125 vdc2 One power supply, 220-250 vdc3 Two power supplies, 48 vdc4 Two power supplies, 110-125 vdc5 Two power supplies, 220-250 vdc

A With Test BlocksB Without Test Blocks

A Future useA Function Group A SeeB Function Group B DGP SelectionC Function Group C Guide

A Revision Level

DGP Selection Guide

FUNCTIONS and FEATURES A B C Stator Differential 87G X X XCurrent Unbalance 46 X X XLoss of Excitation 40-1, 40-2 X X XAnti-motoring 32 Two One TwoOC - voltage restraint 51V X X XStator Ground 64G1 � X X XStator Ground 64G2 � X - XStator Ground 27TN � - - XNeutral OC 51GN - X XOver Excitation 24 (Volts/Hz) X X XOver Voltage X X XUnder Voltage - X XUnder Frequency 81-U Four Two FourOver Frequency 81-O Four Two FourAccidental Energization Logic X X XSequential Trip Logic X X XVoltage Trans. Fuse Failure X X XOscillography Data Capture X X XRS232 Communications Ports Two Two TwoPrinter Output X - XIRIG-B Input X - XDEC1000 compatible - - X

� 64G1 is Fundamental Frequency Overvoltagefunction, also known as 59GN.

� 64G2 uses 3rd harmonic comparator algorithm forenhanced security.

� 27TN is 3rd harmonic Undervoltage function su-pervised by an adjustable window of forwardpower.

In addition to the standard models described above,several special models of the DGP relay are alsoavailable. Following are some of the frequently usedspecial models with a brief description.

DGP***AAA-1010This model is similar to standard DGP***AAA ex-cept the following major changes:

• All Digital Inputs are rated for nominal voltage of110 - 250 vdc instead of the standard 48 - 250 vdc.

• Logic for function 51V is modified to removefault detector supervision.

• Separate terminals are provided for the optionalsecond power supply input.

Refer to instruction book GEK-105552 for additionaldetail.

DGP***ABA-0005This model is similar to standard DGP***ABA ex-cept the following major changes:

• Includes function 27TN.• Includes oscillography data capture and IRIG-B

input capabilities.• Suitable for application with 208 vac nominal

input.

Refer to instruction book GEK-105587 for additionaldetail.

}

GEK-100666 Table of Contents

1-1

Chapter 1 - PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1 - PRODUCT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................... 1-1

LIST OF FIGURES................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

1-1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-3

1-2 APPLICATION................................................................................................................................................................. 1-3

1-3 PROTECTION.................................................................................................................................................................. 1-3Stator differential (87G)...................................................................................................................................................... 1-3Current unbalance (46)....................................................................................................................................................... 1-3Loss of excitation (40)......................................................................................................................................................... 1-4Anti-motoring (32)............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4Time overcurrent with voltage restraint (51V)..................................................................................................................... 1-4Stator ground (64G, 27TN).................................................................................................................................................. 1-4Ground overcurrent (51GN)................................................................................................................................................ 1-5Over-excitation (24)............................................................................................................................................................ 1-5Overvoltage (59)................................................................................................................................................................. 1-5Undervoltage (27)............................................................................................................................................................... 1-6Over- and underfrequency (81)............................................................................................................................................ 1-6Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure (VTFF).......................................................................................................................... 1-6Accidental Energization (AE) .............................................................................................................................................. 1-6

1-4 OTHER FEATURES......................................................................................................................................................... 1-6Inputs.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-6Output relays....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-7Start-up self tests................................................................................................................................................................. 1-8Run-time self tests ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-8Adaptive sampling frequency............................................................................................................................................... 1-9Trip-circuit monitor............................................................................................................................................................. 1-9Sequence of events .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-9Time synchronization........................................................................................................................................................... 1-9Fault report & oscillography data....................................................................................................................................... 1-9Local Man-Machine Interface (MMI) ................................................................................................................................1-10Local printer .....................................................................................................................................................................1-10Remote communications ....................................................................................................................................................1-10Remote control ..................................................................................................................................................................1-10Password protection..........................................................................................................................................................1-11


1-2

LIST OF FIGURESFIGURE 1-1 SIMPLIFIED LOGIC DIAGRAM - 87G, 32, 27, 59, & AE............................................................................................1-12FIGURE 1-2 SIMPLIFIED LOGIC DIAGRAM - 46, 40, & 51V.........................................................................................................1-13FIGURE 1-3 SIMPLIFIED LOGIC DIAGRAM - 64G1, 64G2, 51GN, & 24......................................................................................1-14FIGURE 1-4 SIMPLIFIED LOGIC DIAGRAM - 81-O & 81-U.........................................................................................................1-15FIGURE 1-5 SIMPLIFIED LOGIC DIAGRAM - VT FUSE FAILURE ..................................................................................................1-16FIGURE 1-6 (0145D8227 [4]) ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM - WITH TEST BLOCKS, WYE VT'S..........................................................1-17FIGURE 1-7 (0145D8867 [3]) ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM - WITH TEST BLOCKS, DELTA VT'S .......................................................1-18FIGURE 1-8 (0158D7383 SH. 1[1]) ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM - WITHOUT TEST BLOCKS, WYE VT'S............................................1-19FIGURE 1-9 (0158D7383 SH. 2) ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM - WITHOUT TEST BLOCKS, DELTA VT'S..............................................1-20FIGURE 1-10 FREQUENCY/SENSITIVITY CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................................................1-21FIGURE 1-11 (0286A2925 SH.1 [2]) DIGITAL RELAY SYMBOL LEGEND.....................................................................................1-22FIGURE 1-12 (0286A4911 SH.9) DIGITAL RELAY SYMBOL LEGEND..........................................................................................1-23

GEK-100666 Chapter 1 - Product Description

1-3

1-1 GENERALThe DGP™ system is a microprocessor-based digitalrelay system that uses wave-form sampling of currentand voltage inputs to provide protection, controland monitoring of generators. These samples areused to compute current and voltage phasors thatare used for the protection-function algorithms.The DGP™ system uses a man-machine interface(MMI) and DGP-LINK software for local and remotecommunication respectively.

This instruction book describes all the functionsavailable in various DGP models. Refer to GettingStarted section for Nomenclature Selection Guideto determine functions included in a specific model.

1-2 APPLICATIONThe DGP system is designed to be used on hydroe-lectric, gas, and steam generating units. Any size ofgenerator can be protected with this digital system.

More detailed application considerations are con-tained below in the remaining headings of this sec-tion and in the CALCULATION OF SETTINGS sec-tion.

1-3 PROTECTIONThe following protection functions are available inthe DGP systems.

1. Stator Differential (87G) 2. Current Unbalance (46) 3. Loss of Excitation (40) 4. Anti-Motoring (32) 5. Time Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint (51V) 6. Stator Ground (64G1, 64G2, and 27TN) 7. Ground Overcurrent (51GN) 8. Over-excitation (24) 9. Overvoltage (59)10. Undervoltage (27)11. Over and Underfrequency (81)12. Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure (VTFF)13. Accidental Energization (AE)

Figures 1-1 through 1-5 show simplified logic dia-grams of the above functions.

Stator differential (87G)

This function provides high-speed protection of thegenerator stator during internal phase-to-phase, andthree-phase, faults. It uses a product-restraint algo-rithm with dual-slope characteristic as shown inFigures 2-2 through 2-5. Refer to Fig. 1-1 for thelogic diagram of this function.

Function 87G will not operate for turn-to-turn faultsin the machine windings.

It will also not operate for single-phase-to-groundfaults, if the system is ungrounded or high-impedance grounded. Phase-to-ground protectionby this function requires that the neutral of the ma-chine (or another machine operating in parallel) begrounded. A small portion of the winding next tothe neutral will not be protected, the amount beingdetermined by the voltage necessary to cause mini-mum pickup current to flow through the neutral-to-ground impedance. Current-limiting devices in theneutral-ground circuit increase this impedance andwill decrease the ground-fault-protection coverage ofthis function.

Current unbalance (46)

There are several causes for unbalance in the gen-erator. Some of these conditions are unbalancedloads, unbalanced system faults and/or open cir-cuits. The negative-sequence component (I2) of sta-tor current is directly related to this unbalance andsets up a counter-rotating flux field in the machine.This in turn causes local heating in the rotor iron.The capability of machines to withstand the heatingcaused by unbalance currents is typically expressedin terms of an I2

2T constant, and is supplied by themanufacturer of the machine.

The current-unbalance trip function (46T) of theDGP system provides operating-time characteristicsexpressed as I2

2T=K, as shown in Figure 2-6. A linearreset characteristic is incorporated, to approximatethe machine cooling following an intermittent cur-rent-unbalance condition. In addition to 46T, theDGP system also includes a current-unbalance alarmfunction, 46A, which is operated by the negative-sequence component (I2) with an adjustable pickupand time delay. See Figure 1-2 for the logic dia-gram.


1-4

Loss of excitation (40)

This function is used to detect loss of excitation onsynchronous machines. It includes two mho charac-teristics, looking into the machine, each with ad-justable reach, offset, and time delay. Logic is pro-vided in the DGP system to block this function bypresence of a negative-sequence voltage (indicatinga voltage transformer fuse failure -VTFF condition)and/or an external VTFF Digital Input DI6 (SeeFigure 1-2).

Excitation can be lost due to inadvertent tripping ofthe field breaker, open or short circuit on the fieldwinding, regulator failure, or loss of the source tothe field winding. Loss of excitation can be damag-ing to the machine and/or detrimental to the op-eration of the system. When a synchronous genera-tor loses excitation, it will tend to act as an induc-tion generator; it will run above normal speed, oper-ate at reduced power and receive its excitation(VARS) from the system. The impedance seen by arelay looking into a generator will depend on themachine characteristics, the load flow prior to theloss of excitation, and the type of excitation failure.

Studies indicates that first zone mho function (40-1)can be set to detect severe cases of excitation failurewith a shorter time delay, whereas the second zone(40-2) can be set to detect all the excitation failurecases. A longer time delay setting is required for the40-2 function for security during stable power systemswing conditions. Figure 2-7 shows the characteris-tics of this function.

Anti-motoring (32)

On a total or partial loss of prime mover, if thepower generated is less than no-load losses of themachine, real power will start flowing into the gen-erator. Typical motoring power of different kinds ofprime movers are shown in Table 1-1. For a specificapplication, the minimum motoring power of thegenerator should be obtained from the supplier ofthe unit.

The DGP system includes a reverse power functionwith adjustable time-delay. Either one or two (32-1& 32-2) independent set points are incorporateddepending on the DGP model number.

Table 1-1: Typical Motoring Power

Type ofprime movers

Motoring Powerin percent of unit rating

Gas Turbine 10 - 100Diesel 15 - 25Hydraulic Turbine 2 - 100Steam Turbine 0.5 - 4

The 32-1 can be configured as a part of sequentialtripping logic as shown in Figure 1-1. If the sequen-tial trip logic is used, 32-1 is enabled when closing ofturbine inlet valves is indicated by digital input DI2following a turbine trip. The trip sequence is thencontinued when timer TL1 times out. The 32-2, ifincluded, is not dependent on the DI2 and is pri-marily intended to provide backup to the sequentialtrip. If the sequential trip is not enabled, the 32-1can be used as anti motoring similar to 32-2.

Time overcurrent with voltage re-straint (51V)

A system must be protected against prolonged gen-erator contribution to a fault on the system. A time-overcurrent function with voltage restraint (51V) isincorporated in the DGP system, primarily to pro-vide a part of the system backup protection. Asshown in the logic diagram Figure 1-2, this functionis supervised by a fault detector and VTFF. TheVTFF supervision can be by an internal and/or ex-ternal (DI6) VTFF function. See Figures 2-8through 2-11 for the characteristic curves of the51V. Note that a separate algorithm is processed foreach phase, with the restraint provided by corre-sponding phase voltage (see Table 2-2). The re-straint is proportional to the magnitude of the volt-age and is independent of the phase angle. A linearreset characteristic is incorporated for this function.

Stator ground (64G, 27TN)

This function consists of two overlapping zones(64G1 and 64G2/27TN) to detect stator groundfaults in a high-impedance-grounded generator sys-tem. The 64G1 is standard in all DGP models, how-ever, the 64G2/27TN are provided in some modelsonly. The two zones together cover 100% of the sta-tor windings. See Figure 1-3 for the logic diagram.

Normally the generator-stator neutral has a poten-tial close to ground. With the occurrence of a stator


1-5

ground fault, a potential increase will occur on theneutral for all faults except those near the neutral.64G1 uses a fundamental-frequency neutral over-voltage to cover about 95% of the stator winding,depending on the pickup voltage setting. Alter-nately, the function 64G1 can be used as a genera-tor-bus ground detector in a high-impedancegrounded or an ungrounded system. For this appli-cation, the VN input must be a zero-sequence voltagederived from the generator bus, and functions64G2/27TN must be disabled.

64G2 is based on computation of the percentage ofthird-harmonic voltage at the generator neutral(VN3), compared to the total third harmonic voltagegenerated. This function is designed to cover 15%of the neutral end of the stator windings, and is su-pervised by fundamental- and third-harmonic volt-age thresholds. These thresholds are fixed at 30and 0.5 volts respectively. The third harmoniccomparator method used for this function elimi-nates need to know the generator harmonic charac-teristic in order to use or set this function. Note thatwye-connected VT's are required for proper opera-tion of 64G2.

27TN is third hamonic neutral undervoltage func-tion with a forward power supervision and can beused with either wye or delta connected vt’s. Thepercentage of stator windings covered by this func-tion will depend on threshold setting of the func-tion as well as the VN3 generated by the machine atthe time of the fault. Magnitude of the VN3 voltageunder normal conditions is a function of several fac-tors such as type of generator, load current, loadpower factor, system status, etc. and can be verysmall (nearly zero) under some combinations of theconditions. To enhance the security during some ofthe low VN3 voltage conditions, the function can beinhibited by a settable window of forward power. Itshould be noted however that other conditions in-fluencing the VN3 voltage may make the function27TN insecure. In these cases function 64G2 avail-able in some DGP models (see DGP nomenclatureguide), or some other means should be considered.

Digital input DI1 can be configured to block64G2/27TN when the generator is off-line. Thisprovision is made to enhance security of the func-tions under conditions such as static start of the gasturbine generator. Temporary ungrounding ofgenerator neutral during the static start can looklike a ground fault near the neutral.

Ground overcurrent (51GN)

51GN is an inverse overcurrent function available insome DGP models and can be used to detect statorground faults in a high or low resistance groundedgenerator system. See Figure 1-3 for simplified logicdiagram and Figure 2-16 for the inverse time-current characteristics.

This function uses current INR which can be derivedby residual connection or by using a generator neu-tral CT as noted in Figures 1-6 and 1-7.

Since this function is independent of the phase cur-rent inputs, it can alternately be connected to a CTin the neutral of the generator step-up transformer.

Over-excitation (24)

Over-excitation can be caused by regulator failure,load rejection, or an excessive excitation when thegenerator is off line. It can also result from decreas-ing speed while the regulator or an operator at-tempts to maintain rated stator voltage. The quan-tity Volts/Hertz is proportional to magnetic flux inthe generator and step-up transformer cores and isused by the DGP system to detect the over-excitationcondition. See Figure 1-3 for the logic diagram.

The over-excitation protection includes trip (24T)and alarm (24A) functions. 24T consists of an in-verse function and an instantaneous function withtime-delay characteristics. The combination ofthese two characteristics allows the 24T setting tofollow closely the generator and/or step-up trans-former V/Hz limit curve. Both 24A and 24T arecomputed for each of the three phase voltages (seeTable 2-3).

Function 24T can be configured to operate differentoutput relays for generator on-line and off-line con-ditions. This function incorporates a user-settablelinear reset characteristic to mimic machine cool-ing. Figures 2-12 through 2-14 show the characteris-tics of this function.

Overvoltage (59)

This function consists of a positive-sequence over-voltage with an user selectable inverse or definitetime characteristic. See Figure 1-1 for the logic dia-gram and Figure 2-15 for the inverse time-voltagecharacteristics. A linear reset characteristic is incor-porated for this function. The overvoltage function


1-6

can be considered as a backup to the volts-per-hertzfunction. Some possible causes of this condition area system disturbance or regulator failure.

Undervoltage (27)

This function consists of a positive-sequence under-voltage with an user selectable inverse or definitetime characteristic. See Figure 1-1 for the logic dia-gram and Figure 2-17 for the inverse time-voltagecharacteristics. A linear reset characteristic is incor-porated for this function.

Over- and underfrequency (81)

This function provides over- and under-frequencyprotection, each with an adjustable time delay. Ei-ther two or four over- and under-frequency steps areprovided depending on the DGP model used. Allfrequency functions are supervised by an adjustablepositive-sequence voltage level. This undervoltagecut-off level and/or digital input DI1 can be used toblock the frequency functions during the start-up.The frequency disturbance can occur due to a sys-tem fault or islanding of the unit. Also an uncon-nected unit can operate at abnormal frequency dueto malfunction of speed control. Figure 1-4 showsthe logic diagram for this function.

Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure(VTFF)

Functions 40 and 51V may operate for a full or par-tial loss of AC potential caused by one or moreblown fuses. Provisions are made in the DGP systemto block tripping by these functions when a fusefailure is detected. All other protection functionsare allowed to trip. Figure 1-5 shows the logic dia-gram for the VTFF function.

If AC potential is lost on one or more phases, thenegative-sequence voltage (V2) would rise and/orthe positive-sequence voltage (V1) would drop. Ei-ther V2>15V or V1<50V provides a basic indicationof the VTFF condition. This signal is supervised bya Disturbance Detector (DD) and generator positivesequence current (I1) detector (see three-inputAND gate). Supervision by the DD and I1 signalsprovide security against false operation during faultand generator out of service conditions respectively.Security of the function is also further enhanced byuse of A/0 and B/0 timers shown in Figure 1-5.

Signal DD is derived from a combination of se-quence current levels, change in levels, and pickupflags of various protection functions as shown inFigure 1-5.

The VTFF logic of the DGP system allows integra-tion of an external VTFF contact. Either of the twofuse-failure signals or both signals can be configuredto block tripping of functions 40 and 51V.

Detection of VTFF by the DGP system will energizethe 74FF (Fuse Failure alarm) relay, de-energize the74CR (critical alarm) relay, and turn the status LEDto red, even though all protection functions except40 and 51V are unaffected.

Accidental Energization (AE)

A logic is incorporated, as shown in Figure 1-1, todetect accidental energization of the generator.When a generator is energized while at standstill orreduced speed, it will behave and accelerate as aninduction motor. The machine terminal voltageand current during such an event will be a functionof generator, transformer, and system impedance’s.

An instantaneous overcurrent signal (50) is used inthe logic to detect the accidental energization. Thissignal is armed by a logic signal derived from posi-tive-sequence voltage and GEN OFF LINE input DI1.These two "arming" signals can be configured eitherin AND or OR mode, as selected by AE ARM setting.The (50) function is armed 5 seconds after the gen-erator is taken out of service. The logic will auto-matically disarm itself during a normal start-up se-quence when the voltage detector picks up and/orthe generator is on-line.

Special precautions must be taken to ensure that theDGP system and associated trip circuits remain inservice when the generator is out of service, for thislogic to perform. Additionally, the generator off-line input, DI1, connected to the DGP system mustbe reliable. It should also be noted that the pickupflag of function 51V is used as signal 50; thereforethis logic will automatically be disabled if function51V is disabled.

1-4 OTHER FEATURESInputs

The DGP system takes eight current and four volt-age inputs (Refer to Elementary Diagrams 1-6


1-7

through 1-9). The input currents in terminals BH1,BH3, and BH5 (IAS, IBS, and ICS) are used to processfunctions 46, 40, 32, and 51V. As noted in the ele-mentary diagrams, these currents can be derivedfrom system side or neutral side CT's as desired. Ei-ther the system or neutral side CT's can be used forthese functions if the Stator Differential (87G) func-tion of the DGP is enabled.

The current inputs INS and INR are derived from theresidual connections of the respective phase CT'sand do not require dedicated neutral CT's. Zerosequence current at system and/or neutral side ofthe generator stator windings is calculated and thencompared with the measured INS and/or INR values bythe DGP as a part of background Self Test.

Current INR is used to process function 51GN if in-cluded in the specific model used. In this case, adedicated neutral CT can be used for the input INR ifdesired.

The phase voltage inputs to the DGP system can ei-ther be wye or delta, derived from the generatorterminal voltage. VN is derived from the generatorneutral grounding transformer.

A time synchronizing signal can be connected to theDGP for synchronizing its clock to within 1 ms of areference clock. Either IRIG-B or GE's G-NET sys-tem signal can be used depending on the DGPmodel number. This input signal is required only ifit is desired to synchronize the DGP clock to an ex-ternal clock.

There are six digital inputs that can be connected tothe DGP system. Two of these inputs (DI3 & DI4)are assigned for possible routing of externaltrip/alarm signals through the DGP system to takeadvantage of the output configuration or sequence-of-events capability. Generator off-line (DI1), tur-bine inlet-valve-close indication (DI2) and externalVTFF (DI6) inputs are used for various relay logicfunctions. Also a contact input, (DI5), can be usedto trigger optional oscillograph feature of the DGPsystem. In some DGP models, the DI6 input can beconfigured as external VTFF or “Disable All Protec-tion” (refer to Figures 1-6 to 1-9 for detail).

All the digital input circuits are universally rated fornominal control voltages of 48 to 250 VDC.

Output relays

There are eight user-configurable output relays in-cluded in the DGP system. Four of these relays(94G, 94G1, 94G2 & 94G3) are high speed (4 ms)trip-duty rated, with two form A contacts each, andthe remaining four (74A, 74B, 74C & 74D) arestandard speed (8 ms) with one form C contacteach, intended for alarms. Each of the protectionfunctions can be configured to operate any numberof these output relays. The trip outputs are in-tended for, but are not limited to, the followingpurposes:

94G - trip a lockout relay to shut down the machine94G1 - trip field breaker94G2 - trip main generator breaker or breakers94G3 - operate a lockout relay to trip turbine.

In addition to the configurable output relays, fivepre-defined alarm duty relays with a form C contacteach are also included in the DGP system. Thesealarm relays include critical and non-critical self-testalarms (74CR & 74NC), the VTFF alarm (74FF),and loss of- power-supply alarms (PS1 & PS2). Theform C contact of each of the alarm relays, exceptPS1 & PS2, are wired out to the terminal block. Ahard wire jumper is used to select either the form Aor the form B contact of each of the PS1 & PS2 re-lays, as shown in Figure 3-6.

All alarm relays, with the exception of 74CR, PS1 &PS2, are energized when the appropriate alarmconditions exist. Relays 74CR, PS1 and PS2, how-ever, are energized under normal conditions andwill drop out when the alarm conditions exist.

Also included are two additional relays (TESTPICKUP & TEST TRIP) that can be configured tooperate by a selected protection-function pickupflag, and trip output, respectively. These two out-puts are intended to facilitate testing of the selectedprotection function.

A Contact Expansion Unit DEC1000 is also availablewhich can be used with DGP***ACA. DEC1000provides eleven additional output relays which canbe factory configured to user specifications. Refer toproduct catalog GEZ-8188 or instruction book GEK-105561 for additional detail.


1-8

Start-up self tests

The most comprehensive testing of the DGP systemis performed during a power-up. Since the DGP sys-tem is not performing any protection activities atthat time, tests (such as RAM tests) that would bedisruptive to run-time processing may be performedduring the start-up. All processors of the DGP sys-tem participate in the start-up self-test process. Theprocessors communicate their results to each otherso that any failures found can be reported to theuser, and so that each processor successfully com-pletes its assigned self-tests before the DGP systembegins protection activity.

During power-up, each of the microprocessors per-forms start-up self-tests on its associated hardware(PROM, local RAM, shared RAM, interrupt control-ler, timer chip, serial and parallel I/O ports, non-volatile memory, analog and digital I/O circuitry,MMI hardware, etc.). In addition, the DGP systemverifies that the PROM version numbers in all theprocessor boards are compatible. The componentstested at start-up are listed in the Start-Up Self TestsTable in the SERVICING section.

In most cases, if any critical self-test failure is de-tected, the DGP system will not continue its start-up,nor will it cause a reset. An attempt will be made tostore the DGP system status, to initialize the MMIand remote communications hardware/software forcommunicating status, and to print a diagnosticmessage. The critical alarm relay will be de-energized.

If no failures are detected, the DGP system com-pletes initialization of its hardware and software.Next, each processor board (DAP and SSP) will en-able the outputs. As a final step, the DGP systemchecks the results of all the tests, to determinewhether to turn the status lamp to green on thefront panel.

The start-up procedure will take approximately oneminute. As soon as the SSP successfully completes itsPROM test and initializes the display hardware, themessage "INITIALIZING" will appear on the display.When all DGP system initialization is completed sat-isfactorily, the display will be blanked and the DGPsystem begins acquiring and processing data.

Run-time self tests

Each of the processors will have "idle time" when thesystem is in a quiescent state; i.e., when the DGP sys-tem is not performing fault or post-fault processing.During this idle time, each processor will perform"background" self-tests that are not disruptive to theforeground processing. If any background self-testfails, the test is repeated. To declare a component"failed", the test must fail three consecutive times.In the case of critical failures, the DGP system willforce a self reset to resume operation again after anintermittent failure. The reset activities are identi-cal to the start-up activities except that not all start-up self-tests are performed.

A reset is not reported to the user by the DGP sys-tem. If the reset is successful, no message is printed,no failure status is recorded, and the critical alarm isnot generated; however, during the reset procedure,the red LED on the MMI panel will light and a fail-ure code may appear on the MMI display. If the re-set is not successful, the processor board will be shutdown, leaving the MMI panel displaying the aboveerror information. Refer to the SERVICING sectionof this manual for error codes. To prevent contin-ual resets in the case of a solid failure, both hard-ware and software will permit only four resets in aone-hour period. On the fifth reset, the DGP systemwill not perform initialization, but will attempt toinitialize MMI, communications, and the criticalalarm output, as in the case of a start-up with a criti-cal self-test failure.

The components tested in the background are listedin the Run-time Background Self Tests Table in theSERVICING section. The testing of I/O hardware isdone in the foreground, so that the processors knowwhen a given component or port is in use and there-fore not available for testing. The componentstested in the foreground are listed in the Run-timeForeground Self Tests Table in the SERVICING sec-tion. Some foreground tests are performed everysample period, while others are performed less fre-quently. As with background self-tests, any failedtest is repeated and must fail three consecutive timesto be considered a failure. Although not specificallya "self" test, the trip-circuit continuity monitoring isperformed as a foreground test. Refer to the TRIP-CIRCUIT MONITOR portion of this section.

In addition to background self-tests, the operatormay initiate a visual-response test of the MMI com-


1-9

ponents. Refer to the MMI ... Display Test in theACCEPTANCE TESTS section of this manual.

Adaptive sampling frequency

The DGP system samples analog input waveforms ata rate of 12 per cycle. An adaptive sampling fre-quency is used to maintain this rate over the powersystem frequencies of 30.5 to 79.5 Hz. As a result ofthis feature, the measurement accuracy of the ana-log inputs and the sensitivities of the protectionfunctions are maintained over the range of powersystem frequencies. This feature provides an im-proved protection for faults during off-normal fre-quencies, such as start-up condition. Figure 1-10shows variations in sensitivity of protection func-tions at different power system frequencies.

The sampling frequency is based on 30.5 Hz for thepower system frequencies below 30.5 Hz and is basedon 79.5 Hz for the frequencies above 79.5 Hz. Ineither case, if the AC voltage to the DGP systemdrops below approximately 20 V, the sampling fre-quency is automatically based on nominal systemfrequency (SYSFREQ setting).

The sampling frequency, which is 12 times themeasured system frequency, can be accessed as oneof the Present Values from the DGP system.

Trip-circuit monitor

The trip-circuit monitor consists of DC voltage andcurrent monitors (TVM and TCM respectively).Each of the trip contacts shown with polarity marksin Figures 1-6 to 1-9 is monitored. The TVM andTCM can be selectively disabled for each of the tripcircuits.

Under normal conditions, DC voltage across each ofthe contacts is continuously monitored. If the DCvoltage becomes virtually zero, then the trip circuithas "failed open". The TVM is active only when thegenerator is on-line, as indicated by the input DI1.This function is intended to replace the indicatinglight typically used for trip circuit monitoring, andit is universally rated for 48 through 250 volts DC. Anon-critical alarm is generated when the TVM de-tects an abnormality.

When the DGP system issues a trip, DC currentthrough each of the appropriate trip contacts ismonitored. The trip relay is sealed-in, as long as thecurrent is flowing, to protect the contact. A mini-

mum current of 150 milliamperes is required for theTCM to recognize the trip current. Status of the tripcurrent flow, following issuance of any trip, is loggedin the sequence of events.

Sequence of events

This function time-tags and stores in memory thelast 100 events. The resolution of the time-taggingis 1 millisecond. The event list contains power sys-tem events, operator actions, and self-test alarms.The sequence of events can be accessed, either lo-cally or remotely, by a PC via one of the RS232 ports.A full description of this function is contained inthe INTERFACE section.

Time synchronization

The DGP system includes a real time clock that canrun freely or be synchronized from an external sig-nal. Two different external time-sync signals arepossible. If the DGP system is connected to the hostcomputer of a G-NET substation information andcontrol system, then the DGP system receives a time-sync pulse via pin 25 of port PL-1. If the DGP systemis not connected to a G-NET host computer, then ademodulated IRIG-B signal connected to optionalport PL-3 may be used to synchronize the clock. Inboth cases, the clock in a given DGP system is syn-chronized to within ±1 millisecond of any otherdigital relay clock, provided the two relays are wiredto the same synchronizing signal.

Fault report & oscillography data

A fault report is initiated in the DGP system by anyone of the protection-function pickup flags or anoptional external oscillograph trigger input, DI5.For the fault report to be completed and stored, theDGP system either has to issue a trip or the DI5 in-put contact must close any time during the fault re-port period. The fault report period begins whenthe first protection function flag is up, or the DI5input contact is closed. It ends either when the DGPsystem issues a trip, or when the DGP system is donecapturing the selected number of post-fault wave-form cycles, whichever is later. If all the pickup flagsreset without issuing a trip and the DI5 does notclose, the fault report initiated by the protection flagwill not be completed or stored.

The fault report includes unit ID, date and time,system operating time, pre-fault metering values,


1-10

fault currents and voltages, trip/fault types, and upto 14 sequence-of-event points logged after the faultreport was initiated. The system operating time(OP TIME) is the time difference between the firstprotection-function pickup flag and the first protec-tion-function trip. The DGP system stores up to thelast three fault reports in its memory. A full descrip-tion of the fault report is contained in theINTERFACE section.

The DGP model with oscillography data capturecapability will store the waveform data in its memoryeach time the DGP system stores a fault report. Atotal of 120 cycles of data can be stored in the DGPsystem. The 120-cycles memory is divided in 1, 2 or3 partitions, based on the setting NUM FLTS(#0111). The number of prefault cycles capturedper fault can be set up to 20 cycles. It should benoted that the pre-fault cycles are based on the firstflag or DI5 to initiate the data capture.

Oscillography data includes station and generatoridentification, a complete list of settings, the faultreport, internal flags, and a selected number of pre-fault and post-fault waveform cycles. This data canbe graphically displayed (Figures 10-1 and 10-2) us-ing an optional DGP-DATA software program. Fur-ther description of this function is contained in theSOFTWARE section.

Local Man-Machine Interface (MMI)

A local MMI, incorporating a keypad, light-emitting-diode (LED) display, and 19 target LED's, is pro-vided to allow the user to enter settings, display pre-sent values, view fault target information, and accessstored data. The use and functioning of the MMI isfully described in the INTERFACE section.

Local printer

An optional printer port (PL-2) on the rear of theDGP system permits the use of a serial printer. Theport can also be used to connect the contact expan-sion unit DEC1000 (DGP*ACA only) which pro-vides eleven additional output relays. The sequenceof events (SOE) data are available at this port forimmediate printing as they occur. Additionally, forDGP***AAA models, variety of information storedin the DGP system's memory can also be printedwhen requested via the local MMI, as described inthe INTERFACE section.

Remote communications

Two RS232 serial ports are provided to permit theuser to communicate with the DGP system from anIBM PC-compatible computer. One of the ports, aDB-25 (PL-1), is located on the rear of the case andthe other, a DB-9 (COMM), is located on the frontplate of the MMI module.

When communication via a PC is desired, the PCmay be connected via the proper null-modem cable,provided the cable length does not exceed 50 feet,or the PC may be connected via interposing mo-dems when physically remote from the DGP system.A DGP-LINK software is required to communicatewith the DGP system. The capabilities and use ofthe software are described in the SOFTWARE sec-tion. Refer to the INTERFACE section for detailsregarding the required cables.

When connection to host computer of a station in-tegration system is desired, two different physicalconnections are possible. Standard hard-wire cablesmay be used for distances up to 50 feet. For longerdistances it is possible to add an optional externaladapter that plugs into PL-1 to provide a fiber opticlink between the DGP system and the host com-puter. An isolated 5 volt DC supply is internallyconnected to pin 11 of PL-1 to power this externaladapter.

It is permissible to have cables and associatedequipment connected to each port simultaneously.However, when one port is active the other is effec-tively disabled. For instance, when PL-1 is con-nected to host computer of an integration system, itis not possible to log into the DGP from the frontport if the integration system is active. If PL-1 isconnected to a modem and the front port is con-nected to a PC using a null-modem cable, then thefirst port that becomes active is given preference,and the other port is disabled until the first is re-leased.

Remote control

By using the local MMI or a remote PC connected tothe RS232 port, it is possible to operate selectivelyany of the four trip output relays for remote control.The control action may include shutdown of themachine, field breaker trip, main generator breakertrip, turbine trip, etceteras, depending on theequipment connected to the outputs. The controls


1-11

described above can be enabled or disabled by ahard-wired jumper located on the MMI module, asshown in Figure 3-5. As shipped from the factory,this jumper is physically present and the RemoteControl is disabled. To enable the Control, thejumper must be removed.

Password protection

Passwords provide security when using the localman-machine interface (MMI) or during remotecommunications while running the DGP-LINK pro-gram. Two different passwords provide local MMIsecurity for 1) control operations (close trip-outputcontacts) and 2) settings changes. Three differentpasswords in the DGP-LINK program provide re-mote communications security for 1) view and up-load information, 2) control operations, and 3) set-tings changes. Refer to the INTERFACE section fora description of MMI password usage, and refer tothe SOFTWARE section for a description of DGP-LINK password usage.


1-12

87G

A E

CONFIGURABLELOGIC (2)

TRIP A94G

O R

TRIP B94G1

O R

TRIP C94G2

O R

TRIP D94G3

O R

ALARM74A

O R

ALARM74B

O R

ALARM74C

O R

ALARM74D

O R

Notes :(1) Ind ica tes an opt iona l funct ion ( inc ludes assoc ia ted log ic ) . Refer to DGP nomenc la ture se lec t ion gu ide fo r ava i lab le func t ions in a speci f ic model .(2 ) Each o f the ava i lab le pro tec t ion func t ions can be conf igured to opera te any combinat ion o f the 8 output re lays (4-Tr ip and 4-A larm) .

Undervol tage(1) 27

(+) DI1

Gen.Off-Line

A N D

Overvol tage 59

Reverse Pwr.No. 2 (1)

A N D TL2 3 2 - 2

Reverse Pwr.No. 1

(+) DI2

Turbine Inlet ValveClosed

Seq. Tr ip Enabled

(+)DI1

SELBKDI1Gen.Off-Line

A N D A N DO R TL1 3 2 - 1

AE

(+) DI1

A N D

GEN.OFF-LINE

A E A R M

A N D50 (51V Pickup Flag)

A N D A N DVTFF

PUD O

V1 < 30VO R

O R PU=5 secDO=0.25 sec

A N D

StatorDifferential 87G

Figure 1-1 Simplified Logic Diagram - 87G, 32, 27, 59, & AE(Stator Differential, Reverse Power, Over/Undervoltage, and Accidental Energization Functions)


1-13

87G

A E


TRIP A94G

O R

TRIP B94G1

O R

TRIP C94G2

O R

TRIP D94G3

O R

ALARM74A

O R

ALARM74B

O R

ALARM74C

O R

ALARM74D

O R

Notes :(1 ) T ime rs TL21 and TL22 a re ava i l ab le i n mode l s DGP** *ACA on l y .(2 ) Each o f the ava i lab le pro tec t ion func t ions can be conf igured to opera te any combinat ion o f the 8 output re lays (4-Tr ip and 4-A larm) .

Loss of ExcitationZone 1 4 0 - 1

VTFF+DI6

F D

Overcurrent(voltage restraint) 51V

(+) DI3T L 2 1(1 )External Trip - 1

DI3

DI4T L 2 2(1 )External Trip - 2

DI4(+)

Current Unbalance(Alarm)

T L 1 4 4 6 A

Current Unbalance(Trip) 4 6 T

TL12A N D

Loss of ExcitationZone 2 4 0 - 2TL13A N D

A N D

(+) DI6

E x t . V T F F O R

V 2 > 1 5 VSELV2SUP

PUD O

PU=3 SamplesDO=5 Samples

E N A

DIS

Figure 1-2 Simplified Logic Diagram - 46, 40, & 51V(Current Unbalance, Loss of Excitation, and Time Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint)


1-14


TRIP A94G

O R

TRIP B94G1

O R

TRIP C94G2

O R

TRIP D94G3

O R

ALARM74A

O R

ALARM74B

O R

ALARM74C

O R

ALARM74D

O R

Notes :(1) Ind icates an opt ina l funct ion ( inc ludes assoc ia ted log ic ) . Refer to DGP nomenc la ture se lec t ion gu ide fo r ava i lab le func t ions in a speci f ic model .(2 ) Each o f the ava i lab le pro tec t ion func t ions can be conf igured to opera te any combinat ion o f the 8 output re lays (4-Tr ip and 4-A larm) .

Overexcitation(Alarm)

T L 6 2 4 A

Stator GroundZone 1 64G1T L 4

A N D 2 4 T(On-L ine )

A N D

Overexcitation(Trip) T L 7

T i m e

InstO R DI1(+)

G e n .Of f -L ine

2 4 T(Of f -L ine)

Neutral Overcurrent(1) 5 1 G N

Stator GroundZone 2 (1) A N D T L 5

V P 3 > 0 . 5 V

V 1 > 3 0 V

(+) DI1


6 4 G 2

TL20A N D

V1 ≥ 25V

(+) DI1

GEN. OFF-LINE

SELBKDI1

POWER < FORPWR-L

POWER > FORPWR-HO R

2 7 T N(1)

VN 3

≤ 27TN P ICKUP

Figure 1-3 Simplified Logic Diagram - 64G1, 64G2, 51GN, & 24(Stator Ground and Over-excitation Functions)


1-15

A E


TRIP A94G

O R

TRIP B94G1

O R

TRIP C94G2

O R

TRIP D94G3

O R

ALARM74A

O R

ALARM74B

O R

ALARM74C

O R

ALARM74D

O R

Notes :(1) Ind ica tes an opt iona l funct ion ( inc ludes assoc ia ted log ic ) . Refer to DGP nomenc la ture se lec t ion gu ide fo r ava i lab le func t ions in a speci f ic model .(2 ) Each o f the ava i lab le pro tec t ion func t ions can be conf igured to opera te any combinat ion o f the 8 output re lays (4-Tr ip and 4-A larm) .

Under FrequencySet Point - 1 81-1UTL8A N D

Under FrequencySet Point - 3 (1) 81-3UTL10A N D

Under FrequencySet Point - 2 81-2UTL9A N D

Under FrequencySet Point - 4 (1) 81-4UTL11A N D

(+) DI1


V 1 > U V C U T O F F

Over FrequencySet Point - 1 81-1OTL15

Over FrequencySet Point - 3 (1) TL17

Over FrequencySet Point - 2

81-3O

TL16

Over FrequencySet Point - 4 (1) 81-4OTL18

81-2O

A N D

A N D

A N D

A N D

Figure 1-4 Simplified Logic Diagram - 81-O & 81-U(Over- and Under-Frequency Functions)


1-16

Note :* = 1 F O R 5 A M P R A T E D D G P ' s .* = 5 F O R 1 A M P R A T E D D G P ' s .

A N D

A N D

(+)External VTFF

DI6

O R

PUD O

O RPUD O

V 2 > 1 5 V

V 1 < 5 0 V TL19P U = 9 0 0 0 s a m p l e sD O = 0

PU = 36 samp lesD O = 0

E N A

DIS V T F FV T F F A l a r m

Cr i t i ca l A la rm

A N D

O R O RO R

Superv ise5 1 V ,

2 1 ( F u t u r e )

F DD D

I1 > 0 .1 / *

I0 > 0 .6 /*I2 > 0 .6 /*

|∆I0| > 0 .2 / *

5 1 V P i c k u p F l a g

40 P i ckup F lag

8 7 G P i c k u p F l a g

5 1 G N P i c k u p F l a g

O R

5 1 G N P i c k u p F l a g

21 P ickup F lag (Fu t . )

O R|∆I1| > 0 .2 / *

|∆I2| > 0 .2 / *

6 4 G 1 P i c k u p F l a g

6 4 G 2 P i c k u p F l a g

(+) DI1


O RV T F F + D I 6 Superv ise

5 1 V ,2 1 ( F u t u r e )

Figure 1-5 Simplified Logic Diagram - VT Fuse Failure


1-17

Figure 1-6 (0145D8227 [4]) Elementary Diagram - With Test Blocks, Wye VT's


1-18

Figure 1-7 (0145D8867 [3]) Elementary Diagram - With Test Blocks, Delta VT's


1-19

Figure 1-8 (0158D7383 Sh. 1[1]) Elementary Diagram - Without Test Blocks, Wye VT's


1-20

Figure 1-9 (0158D7383 Sh. 2) Elementary Diagram - Without Test Blocks, Delta VT's


1-21

Frequency Vs SensitivityDGP Relay System

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

System Frequency

Rel

ativ

e S

ensi

tivity

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Figure 1-10 Frequency/Sensitivity characteristics


1-22

Figure 1-11 (0286A2925 Sh.1 [2]) Digital Relay Symbol Legend


1-23

Figure 1-12 (0286A4911 Sh.9) Digital Relay Symbol Legend

GEK-1000666 Table Of Contents

2-1

Chapter 2 - CALCULATION OF SETTINGS

CHAPTER 2 - CALCULATION OF SETTINGS................................................................................................................... 2-1

LIST OF TABLES.................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2

LIST OF FIGURES................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2

2-1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-3

2-2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS....................................................................................................................................... 2-3Unit ID Number, UNITID.................................................................................................................................................... 2-3System Frequency, SYSFREQ.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3Select Trip Voltage Monitoring, SEL TVM........................................................................................................................... 2-3Select Trip Current Monitoring, SEL TCM .......................................................................................................................... 2-3Select Primary/Secondary Units, SELPRIM......................................................................................................................... 2-9Current Transformer Ratio, CT RATIO................................................................................................................................ 2-9Voltage Transformer Ratio, VT RATIO................................................................................................................................ 2-9Communications Port, COMMPORT................................................................................................................................. 2-10Phase Designation, PHASE...............................................................................................................................................2-10Time Synchronization Source, TIMESYNC ........................................................................................................................2-10Number of Fault Events, NUM FLTS.................................................................................................................................2-10Nominal Voltage, NOM VOLT...........................................................................................................................................2-10Rated Current, RATEDCUR..............................................................................................................................................2-10Voltage Transformer Connection, VT CONN.....................................................................................................................2-10Neutral Current Transf. Ratio, NCTRATIO........................................................................................................................2-10

2-3 PROTECTION FUNCTION SETTINGS.........................................................................................................................2-11GENERAL.........................................................................................................................................................................2-11TRIP and ALARM Output Relays.......................................................................................................................................2-11Stator Differential (87G)...................................................................................................................................................2-11Current Unbalance Alarm (46A)........................................................................................................................................2-11Current Unbalance Trip (46T)...........................................................................................................................................2-12Loss of Excitation (40: 40-1, 40-2) ....................................................................................................................................2-12Anti-Motoring (Reverse Power).........................................................................................................................................2-12Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint (51V)..........................................................................................................................2-13Stator Ground Fault (64G-1).............................................................................................................................................2-14Stator Ground Fault (64G-2).............................................................................................................................................2-14Stator Ground Fault (27TN)..............................................................................................................................................2-14Overexcitation Alarm (Volts/Hertz: 24A)...........................................................................................................................2-14Overexcitation Trip (Volts/Hertz: 24T)............................................................................................................................. 2-14Overvoltage (59)...............................................................................................................................................................2-15Undervoltage Cutoff of 81 .................................................................................................................................................2-16Under Frequency (81-U)...................................................................................................................................................2-16Over Frequency (81-O).....................................................................................................................................................2-16Digital Input (DI) ..............................................................................................................................................................2-16Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure (VTFF)........................................................................................................................2-16Accidental Energization (AE) ............................................................................................................................................2-16Ground Overcurrent (51GN).............................................................................................................................................2-17Undervoltage (27).............................................................................................................................................................2-17

GEK-1000666 Table Of Contents

2-2

LIST OF TABLESTABLE 2-1: DGP SYSTEM SETTINGS AND RANGES.................................................................................................................... 2-5TABLE 2-2: RESTRAINT VOLTAGES USED BY FUNCTION 51V .....................................................................................................2-13TABLE 2-3: VOLTAGES USED BY FUNCTION 24T .......................................................................................................................2-15TABLE 2-4: DI1 BLOCKING CONFIGURATION LOOK-UP TABLE ..................................................................................................2-16TABLE 2-5: SETTINGS FORM - DGP***AAA P ROTECTION SYSTEM.........................................................................................2-34TABLE 2-6: SETTINGS FORM - DGP***ABA PROTECTION SYSTEM .........................................................................................2-38TABLE 2-7: SETTINGS FORM - DGP***ACA PROTECTION SYSTEM .........................................................................................2-41

LIST OF FIGURESFIGURE 2-1 SAMPLE GENERATOR SYSTEM................................................................................................................................ 2-4

FIGURE 2-2 TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 87G WITH K1=1% AND PICKUP=0.3 AMP. .........................................2-18

FIGURE 2-3 TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 87G WITH K1=2% AND PICKUP=0.3 AMP ...........................................2-19

FIGURE 2-4 TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 87G WITH K1=5% AND PICKUP=0.3 AMP...........................................2-20

FIGURE 2-5 TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 87G WITH K1=10% & PICKUP=0.3 AMP. ...........................................2-21

FIGURE 2-6 TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC OF FUNCTION 46T..............................................................................................2-22

FIGURE 2-7 MHO CHARACTERISTICS AND SETTING CRITERIA FOR FUNCTIONS 40-1 AND 40-2....................................................2-23

FIGURE 2-8 TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 51V FOR 0-30% RESTRAINT........................................................2-24

FIGURE 2-9 TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 51V FOR 50% RESTRAINT............................................................2-25

FIGURE 2-10 TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 51V FOR 75% RESTRAINT..........................................................2-26

FIGURE 2-11 TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 51V FOR 100% RESTRAINT........................................................2-27

FIGURE 2-12 TIME CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 24T (CURVE 1)......................................................................................2-28



FIGURE 2-15 TIME VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 59 ............................................................................................2-31

FIGURE 2-16 TIME-CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 51GN.......................................................................................2-32

FIGURE 2-17 TIME VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS OF FUNCTION 27 (CURVE 1)............................................................................2-33

GEK-100666 Chapter 2 - Calculation of Settings

2-3

2-1 GENERALThis section provides information to assist the userin determining the required settings for the DGP™protection system. Some settings are based on thesize and type of generator and the type of system it isconnected to, while other settings are the same, re-gardless of the machine and system. Still other set-tings may be set based on user preference.

Those settings that are independent of the systemand machine size or type will be presented first, fol-lowed by machine- and system-dependent settings.At the end of this chapter are blank setting forms(Table 2-5, 2-6, and 2-7), one for each family of theDGP systems. Appropriate form for the DGP of in-terest can be used to record model number, PROMversion number, and settings for specific application.

Table 2-1 lists all the settings and the correspondingranges and units. The column labeled DEFAULT inTable 2-1 indicates the DGP system settings stored inmemory when shipped from the factory. The set-tings described in the subsequent text are arrangedby category-of-settings which correspond to the cate-gory headings displayed on the light-emitting diode(LED) display of the local man-machine interface(MMI). Individual settings or the category headingsare listed by the descriptive name followed by itsmnemonic. The mnemonic is what is displayed onthe local MMI to identify the particular setting orcategory-of-setting heading. In the text, a category-of-settings is identified by all capitals, i. e.,CONFIGURATION: CONFIG.

In the following section a set of example settings willbe presented based on a typical generator system. Byno means will this presentation encompasses all pos-sible setting scenarios or calculations. More impor-tant is the demonstration of the setting method andprocedure to follow.

A sample generator system one line diagram is shownin Figure 2-1; it will be used to demonstrate the ex-ample settings for a DGP protection system.

2-2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGSUnit ID Number, UNITID

The UNITID is a decimal number between 0 and9999 stored in non-volatile memory, which uniquelyidentifies a DGP relay system. When the DGP system

is accessed via one of its serial port, the UNITID mustbe known to establish communication, thus provid-ing a measure of security. UNITID can only bechanged via the local MMI. It is not possible tochange UNITID via DGP-LINK communication soft-ware.

System Frequency, SYSFREQSYSFREQ can be set to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.

Select Trip Voltage Monitoring,SEL TVM

One contact of each of the four trip-output relays canbe monitored for DC voltage by the DGP system.The monitoring is enabled or disabled by setting theSEL TVM to either 1 or 0 respectively. The four-digitcode of the SEL TVM setting applies to 94G, 94G1,94G2, & 94G3, in that order. For example, a settingof 1100 enables TVM for 94G & 94G1 and disablesfor 94G2 & 94G3.

The monitoring of all unused contacts should bedisabled to avoid nuisance alarms.

Select Trip Current Monitoring,SEL TCM

The four trip contacts described above for the SELTVM can also be monitored for DC current by theDGP system when a trip signal is issued. The moni-toring is enabled or disabled by setting the SEL TCMto either 1 or 0 respectively. The four-digit code ofthe SEL TCM setting applies to 94G, 94G1, 94G2, &94G3, in that order. If the trip current through anyof the monitored contacts is not expected to be above150 milliamperes, or if any of the trip circuit is notinterrupted externally, it should be disabled to avoidnuisance sequence-of-event points, or seal-in of theoutput relay.

For example, a setting of 1000 enables TCM for 94Gand disables for 94G1, 94G2 & 94G3.


2-4

Power Sys tem

5 2 G

GSU Transformer200 MVA

18 : 138 KVX1 = 10%

G

Generator2 1 1 , 7 6 5 K V A , 1 8 K VX'd = 0 .216 PUXd = 1 .967 PUI 2

2T capabi l i ty = 10I 2 capabi l i ty = 8%Moto r i ng power = 22000KW

8000 :5 A

8000 :5 A

12000 :240V

1 . 4 5 O h m

18900 :120 V

DGP Protect ion System

VA, VB , VC

IAS, IBS, ICS, INS

IAR, IBR, ICR, INR

V N

9 4 G

9 4 G 1

9 4 G 2

9 4 G 3

Conf igurab le Outputs

T oTr ip

Ci rcu i ts

7 4 A

74B

7 4 C

7 4 D

T oA l a r m

Circu i ts

Figure 2-1 Sample Generator System


2-5

Table 2-1: DGP System Settings And Ranges

RANGE DEFAULT

SETTING # DESCRIPTION 5AMP 1AMP� UNITS 5AMP 1AMP�

CONFIGURATION: CONFIG101 UNITID 0 - 9999 NA 0102 SYSFREQ 50 / 60 HZ 60103 SEL TVM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000104 SEL TCM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000105 SELPRIM PRIMARY (0)

SECNDRY (1)NA SECNDRY

106 CT RATIO 1 - 50000 NA 1107 VT RATIO 1.0 - 240.0 NA 1.0108 COMMPORT BAUD, PARITY, ST

BIT300(3), NONE(0), 1(1)1200(12), ODD (1), 2(2)2400(24), EVEN(2),4800(48)9600(96)

NA 24 N 1

109 PHASE A-B-C (0)A-C-B (1)

NA A-B-C

110 TIMESYNC INTRNL (0)IRIG-B (1)�G-NET (2)

NA INTRNL

111 NUM FLTS 1 - 3 NA 3112 � PREFLT 1 - 20 CYCLES 20113 � OSC TRIG DI ENA (0)

DI DIS (1)NA DI ENA

114 NOM VOLT 100.0 - 225.0 �� VOLT 120.0114 NOM VOLT 100.0 - 140.0 � VOLT 120.0115 RATEDCUR 0.10 - 9.99 0.02 - 1.99 AMP 5.00 1.00116 VT CONN WYE (0)

DELTA (1)NA WYE

117 � NCTRATIO 1 - 50000 NA 1STATOR DIFFERENTIAL: 87G

201 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 0000202 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000203 K1 1.0 - 10.0 % 5.0204 PICKUP 0.20 - 1.00 0.04 - 0.20 AMP 0.30 0.06

CURRENT UNBALANCE -ALARM: 46A301 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000302 PICKUP 0.05 - 2.99 0.01 - 0.60 AMP 0.05 0.01303 TL14 1 - 9 SEC 1

CURRENT UNBALANCE -TRIP: 46T401 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 0000402 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000403 PICKUP 0.05 - 2.99 0.01 - 0.60 AMP 2.00 0.40404 K2 1.0 - 45.0 SEC 1.0

� Unless otherwise noted, setting ranges & factory default settings of 1 amp model are same as for 5 amp model.� Setting not available in DGP***ABA.� Setting not available in DGP***AAA.� Setting not available in DGP***ACA.


2-6

Table 2-1: DGP System Settings And Ranges - continued

RANGE DEFAULT


LOSS OF EXCITATION -SUPERVISION: 40501 SELV2SUP DISABLE (0)

ENABLE (1)NA DISABLE

LOSS OF EXCITATION -ZONE 1: 40-1601 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 0000602 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000603 CENTER 2.50 - 60.00 12.5-300.00 OHM 11.00 55.00604 RADIUS 2.50 - 60.00 12.5-300.00 OHM 8.50 42.50605 TL12 0.01 - 9.99 SEC 0.01

LOSS OF EXCITATION -ZONE 2: 40-2701 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 0000702 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000703 CENTER 2.50 - 60.00 12.50-300.0 OHM 11.00 55.00704 RADIUS 2.50 - 60.00 12.50-300.0 OHM 8.50 42.50705 TL13 0.01 - 9.99 SEC 0.01

ANTI-MOTORING #1: 32-1801 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 0000802 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000803 SQ TR EN YES (1/Y)

NO (3/N)NA YES

804 REV PWR 0.5 - 99.9 0.1 - 19.9 WATT 1.5 0.3805 TL1 1 - 120 SEC 5

ANTI-MOTORING #2: 32-2�

901� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 0000902� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 0000903� REV PWR 0.5 - 99.9 0.1 - 19.9 WATT 1.5 0.3904� TL2 1 - 60 SEC 1

OVERCURRENT WITH VOLTAGE RESTRAINT: 51V1001 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00001002 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001003 PICKUP 0.5 - 16.0 0.1 -3.2 AMP 0.5 0.11004 TIME FAC 0.10 - 99.99 SEC 0.10

STATOR GROUND -ZONE 1: 64G11101 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00001102 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001103 PICKUP 4.0 - 40.0 VOLT 4.01104 TL4 0.1 - 9.9 SEC 0.1

STATOR GROUND -ZONE 2: 64G2�1201� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00001202� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001203� TL5 0.1 - 9.9 SEC 0.1

� Unless otherwise noted, setting ranges & factory default settings of 1 amp model are same as for 5 amp model.� Setting not available in DGP***ABA.


2-7


RANGE DEFAULT

SETTING # DESCRIPTION 5AMP 1AMP� UNITS 5AMP 1AMP �

OVEREXCITATION -ALARM: 24A1301 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001302 PICKUP 1.0 - 1.99 PER UNIT 1.501303 TL6 0 - 9.9 SEC 1.0

OVEREXCITATION -TRIP: 24T1401 TRIP ON (-line) 0000 - 1111 NA 00001402 TRIP OFF (-

line)0000 - 1111 NA 0000

1403 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001404 CURVE # 1 - 4 NA 11405 INV PU 1.00 - 1.99 PER UNIT 1.501406 TIME FAC 0.10 - 99.99 SEC 99.991407 INST PU 1.00 - 1.99 PER UNIT 1.501408 TL7 0 - 9.9 SEC 1.01409 RESET 0 - 999 SEC 1

OVERVOLTAGE: 591501 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00001502 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001503 INV PICKUP 100 - 350�� VOLT 1201503 INV PICKUP 100 - 200� VOLT 1201504 TIME FAC 0.10 - 99.99 SEC 1.001505� CURVE # 1 (Inverse)

2 (Definite Time)NA 1

1506�� INST PU 100 - 400 VOLTS 240OVER/UNDER FREQUENCY VOLTAGE CUTOFF: 81

1601 UVCUTOFF 35 - 99 % 90UNDER FREQUENCY SET POINT 1: 81-1U

1701 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00001702 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001703 SET PNT 40.00 - 65.00 HZ 60.001704 TL8 0.1 - 999.9 SEC 2.0

UNDER FREQUENCY SET POINT 2: 81-2U1801 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00001802 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001803 SET PNT 40.00 - 65.00 HZ 60.001804 TL9 0.05 - 99.99 SEC 2.00

UNDER FREQUENCY SET POINT 3: 81-3U�1901� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00001902� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00001903� SET PNT 40.00 - 65.00 HZ 60.001904� TL10 0.05 - 99.99 SEC 2.00



2-8


RANGE DEFAULT

SETTING # DESCRIPTION 5AMP 1AMP� UNITS 5AMP 1AMP �

UNDER FREQUENCY SET POINT 4: 81-4U�2001� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002002� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002003� SET PNT 40.00 - 65.00 HZ 60.002004� TL11 0.05 - 99.99 SEC 2.00

OVER FREQUENCY SET POINT 1: 81-1O2101 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002102 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002103 SET PNT 45.00 - 79.99 HZ 60.002104 TL15 0.05 - 99.99 SEC 2.00

OVER FREQUENCY SET POINT 2: 81-2O2201 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002202 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002203 SET PNT 45.00 - 79.99 HZ 60.002204 TL16 0.05 - 99.99 SEC 2.00

OVER FREQUENCY SET POINT 3: 81-3O�2301� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002302� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002303� SET PNT 45.00 - 79.99 HZ 60.002304� TL17 0.05 - 99.99 SEC 2.00

OVER FREQUENCY SET POINT 4: 81-4O�2401� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002402� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002403� SET PNT 45.00 - 79.99 HZ 60.002404� TL18 0.05 - 99.99 SEC 2.00

DIGITAL INPUT: DIG INP2501 SELBKDI1 NO BLK (0)

BLK #1-9 (1-9)NA NO BLK

2502 DI3 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002503 DI3 ALRM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002504�� DI3 TIMR� 0.00 - 9.99 SEC 0.012505 (2504�) DI4 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002506 (2505�) DI4 ALRM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002507�� DI4 TIMR 0.00 - 9.99 SEC 0.012508� DI6 FUNC EXTVTFF (0)

DISPROT (1)NA EXTVTFF

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER FUSE FAILURE: VTFF2601 VTFF DISABLE (0)

ENABLE (1)NA DISABLE

� Unless otherwise noted, setting ranges & factory default settings of 1 amp model are same as for 5 amp model.� Setting not available in DGP***ABA.� Setting not available in DGP***AAA.� DI4 TRIP & DI4 ALARM settings are identified by setting #2504 & 2505 respectively in DGP***AAA.


2-9


RANGE DEFAULT


ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION: AE2701 TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002702 ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002703 AE ARM AND (0)

OR (1)NA AND

GROUND OVERCURRENT: 51GN�

2801� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002802� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002803� PICKUP 0.10 - 5.00 0.02 - 1.00 AMP 0.50 0.102804� TIME FAC 0.10 - 99.99 SEC 1.00

UNDERVOLTAGE: 27�

2901� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00002902� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00002903� PICKUP 40 - 210 � VOLT 1002903� PICKUP 40 - 120 � VOLT 1002904� TIME FAC 0.1 - 99.99 SEC 1.002905� CURVE # 1 (Inverse)

2 (Definite Time)NA 1

UNDER VOLTAGE - THIRD HARMONIC: 27TN ��

3001�� TRIP 0000 - 1111 NA 00003002�� ALARM 0000 - 1111 NA 00003003�� PICKUP 0.1 - 9.9 Volt 0.93004�� TL20 0.5 - 99.9 Sec 2.03005�� FORPWR-L 0 - 999 0 - 200 Watt 10 13006�� FORPWR-H 0 - 999 0 - 200 Watt 20 1


Select Primary/Secondary Units,SELPRIM

SELPRIM can be set to either 0 (PRIMARY) or 1(SECNDRY), secondary. This setting determineswhether the PRESENT VALUES (currents, voltages,watts, and vars) are displayed and stored as primaryor secondary values. All user-entered settings areexpressed in terms of secondary values, regardless ofwhether SELPRIM is set to 0 or 1.

Current Transformer Ratio, CT RATIO

CT RATIO can be set over the range of 1 - 50000.This setting applies to all current inputs with a pos-sible exception of current INR. If setting NCTRATIO

is provided, it applies to the current INR. Refer toNeutral Current Transformer Ratio (setting #117)described later.

For the sample generator system,

CT RATIO = 8000/5= 1600

Voltage Transformer Ratio, VT RATIO

VT RATIO can be set over the range of 1.0 - 240.0.For the sample generator system,

VT RATIO = 18900/120= 157.5


2-10

Communications Port, COMMPORT

COMMPORT sets the baud rate, parity, and stopbits of the DGP system's RS232 serial port. The set-ting format is xxyz, where:

Baud Rate = xx = 03, 12, 24, 48, 96Parity = y = 0 (None), 1 (Odd), 2 (Even)Stop Bits = z = 1, 2

The baud rate setting of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, or9600 must be set to match the baud rate of the mo-dem or serial device connected to the RS232 serialports of the DGP system. The parity and stop bitsmust match those selected for the serial port of theremote PC. Normally 1 stop bit is selected. How-ever, certain modems or other communicationshardware might dictate using 2 stop bits. DGP-LINKcommunications software can be configured tomatch this DGP system setting for baud rate, parity,and stop bits.COMMPORT can only be changed via keypad ofthe local MMI. It cannot be changed via DGP-LINKcommunications software.

Phase Designation, PHASEPHASE can be set to either A-B-C or A-C-B to matchthe positive-sequence phase rotation for the genera-tor system where the DGP system is installed. Thissetting permits the DGP system to compute properlyand report the sequence-dependent quantities.

Time Synchronization Source,TIMESYNCTIMESYNC determines the method of synchroniz-ing the DGP system's internal clock, and it can be setto 0 (INTERNAL), 1 (optional, IRIG-B), or 2 (G-NET). TIMESYNC=0 lets the clock run freely fromthe internal oscillator. TIMESYNC=1 synchronizesthe clock using an IRIG-B signal connected directlyto the DGP relay via port PL-3. TIMESYNC=2 syn-chronizes the clock using a signal on pin 25 ofRS232 port PL-1 when connected to a G-NET hostcomputer.

Number of Fault Events, NUM FLTS

NUM FLTS selects the maximum number of faultreports and optional oscillography data that may bestored in memory without overwriting, and can beset to 1, 2, or 3. When the maximum number arestored in memory, the fault report and the oscillo-

graphy data associated with a subsequent storageevent will overwrite the data from the oldest event.

This setting also apportions a fixed amount ofmemory into different sized blocks for oscillographystorage. The following tabulation shows the totalnumber of oscillography cycles allowed per storageevent as a function of NUM FLTS.

NUM FLTS STORAGE CYCLES1 1202 603 40

CAUTION: To avoid loss of fault data stored inthe DGP system, upload and save the data beforechanging this setting.

Nominal Voltage, NOM VOLT

NOM VOLT can be set over the range of 100.0-140.0V (Phase-to-phase).


NOM VOLT18000

(18900 /120) = 114.3 V=

Rated Current, RATEDCUR

RATEDCUR can be set over the range 0.10-9.99(0.02 - 1.99 for 1AMP models) Amperes.


RATEDCUR =211765

(1.732X18)(8000 /5)= 4.25 A

Voltage Transformer Connection,VT CONN

VT CONN may be set to 0 (WYE), or 1 (DELTA).VT CONN must be set to identify the connections ofVT's that supply AC voltage to the DGP system.

Neutral Current Transf. Ratio,NCTRATIO

NCTRATIO setting is available in all DGP modelsexcept DGP***AAA and can be set over the range of1 - 50000. This setting applies to current INR only,refer to Current Transformer Ratio (setting number106) for CT ratio setting of other current inputs.



2-11

NCTRATIO = 8000 ÷ 5= 1600

Example Settings (based on Figure 2-1):

UNITID = 1SYSFREQ = 60SEL TVM = as requiredSEL TCM = as requiredSELPRIM = PRIMARY (0)CT RATIO = 1600VT RATIO = 157.5COMMPORT = 24 N 1PHASE = A-B-C (0)TIMESYNC = INTRNL (0)NUM FLTS = 3NOM VOLT = 114.3 voltsRATEDCUR = 4.25 ampsVT CONN = WYE (0)NCTRATIO = 1600

2-3 PROTECTION FUNCTIONSETTINGSGENERAL

TRIP and ALARM Output Relays

There are eight user-configurable output relays in-cluded in the DGP system. Four of these relays arehigh speed intended for tripping and the other fourare standard speed intended for alarm. Each of theprotection functions described below includes twofour-digit codes, TRIP and ALARM, which config-ure the function to operate any number of these re-lays. An output relay is selected, or not-selected, bysetting a code to either 1, or 0, respectively. Thefour-digit code of the TRIP setting applies to 94G,94G1, 94G2, & 94G3 relays, in that order. Also thefour digit code of the ALARM setting applies to 74A,74B, 74C, & 74D relays, in that order.

Any number of the protection functions can be dis-abled by setting both the TRIP and ALARM codesfor the function or functions to 0000.

The configurable trip and alarm outputs can beused to customize the DGP system in accordancewith a number of trip and alarm strategies of varioususers.

Stator Differential (87G)

Algorithm: Function 87G operates when the follow-ing inequality is met:

I - I > K ( I I )1 2

2

1 2•

I 1 = Generator return-side phase current

I 2 = Generator system-side phase currentK = An adaptive variable

= ÷ • ≤

= × ÷ • >

K1 100 if I I 81

(15 K1) 100 if I I 81

1 2

1 2

K1 = 87G K1 setting in %1. The algorithm is processed only if

I I > (87G PICKUP)1 2−

2. The algorithm is processed separately for eachphase.

3. The initial characteristic slope can be calcu-lated using the formula:

% slope = 100 (K1 100)÷Characteristics: Figures 2-2 through 2-5 show the

curves for selected values of K1 & PICKUP. Thecurve for any combination of the K1 & PICKUPsettings can be derived using the above algo-rithm.

This function should be set as sensitive as practical,keeping adequate margin for CT errors under allthrough-load and through-fault current conditions.K1 and PICKUP setting of 2% and 0.3 ampere re-spectively are recommended for most applicationswhere the system and neutral side CT’s used are ofidentical design. Higher settings must be consid-ered if the CT’s used are not of identical design or ifhigher CT error margin is desired.

For the sample generator system,set K1 = 2% and PICKUP = 0.3 ampere.

Current Unbalance Alarm (46A)

This function is intended to alarm prior to a 46Ttrip, so that an operator can take corrective action.The PICKUP setting should be a safe margin belowthe generator's allowable continuous negative-sequence current.



2-12

set PICKUP = 70% of I2 capability of the machine

=0.7 0.08 211765

1.732 18× ×

×= 380.4 Amperes primary= 0.24 Ampere secondary

set TL14 = 2 seconds.

Current Unbalance Trip (46T)

Algorithm:

Operating time TK2

(I /I )2 FL2= seconds.

I2 = Negative sequence currentK2 = 46T K2 settingIFL = Full load current of the machine

(RATEDCUR)

1. Time T is computed only if I2 > (46T PICKUP)2. Reset time: Linear reset (227 sec. maximum)

Characteristics: Figure 2-6 shows the curves forselected values of K2. The curve for any otherK2 setting can be derived, using the above al-gorithm.

This function should be set at or below the negative-sequence current capability of the machine.

For the sample generator system,set PICKUP = I2 capability of the machine

= 0.08211765

1.732 18 1600×

× ×= 0.34 Ampere secondary

set K2 = machine I2

2 T capability= 10

Loss of Excitation (40: 40-1, 40-2)

Algorithm: Impedance looking in to the machine iscomputed using delta voltage and delta current perthe following equation. Functions 40-1 and 40-2 areidentical, each with an adjustable time delay.

ZV V

I I if setting (#109) PHASE = A - B - C

ZV VI I

if setting (#109) PHASE = A - C - B

aba b

a b

aca c

a c

=−−

=−−

Characteristic and setting criteria: See Figure 2-7.

With settings per the criteria shown in Figure 2-7,function 40-1 would detect the loss of excitation forabout 30% or higher load conditions. Function 40-2would detect for all load conditions; however, somestable power system swing conditions may momen-tarily enter the 40-2 characteristic. For security ofthe function under stable swing conditions, it is rec-ommended to delay functions 40-1 and 40-2 by aminimum of 0.06 and 0.5 seconds respectively.

SELV2SUP can be set to either 0 (DISABLE) or 1(ENABLE). It is recommended to set this to func-tion to ENABLE unless an external VTFF is used viainput DI6.


Z (secondary) kV

MVACTratioVTratio

=18

211.7651600157.5

= 15.54 ohms

X (secondary) 15.54 0.216 3.36ohms

X (secondary) 15.54 1.967 30.57ohms

bbase

2

base

2

'd

d

= ×

×

= × == × =

set SELV2SUP to 1 (ENABLE)

set 40-1,

CENTER15.54 3.36

29.45 ohms

RADIUS15.54

27.77 ohms

TL12 0.06 seconds

=+

=

= =

=

set 40-2,

CENTER30.57 3.36

2.97 ohms

RADIUS30.57

2.28 ohms

TL13 0.5 seconds

=+

=

= =

=

16

15

Anti-Motoring (Reverse Power)

32-1 and optional 32-2 REV PWR can be set over therange of 0.5-99.9 Watts each.

Reverse power levels (REV PWR) of these functionsshould be set at 30 to 70% (depending on power fac-tor following the turbine trip) of motoring power ofthe turbine-generator.


2-13

Timers associated with the anti-motoring are of in-tegrating type to achieve high level of dependabilitywhen the power is arrond the REV PWR setting, par-ticularly at high power factor. Setting of three sec-onds or less is suggested for timer TL1 associatedwith the 32-1 if SQ TR EN (sequential trip enable) isset to YES. If the SQ TR EN is set to NO, the TL1setting should be identical to the TL2 setting as de-scribed below.

Timer TL2, associated with 32-2, should be set tooverride the power swings expected during normalsystem operations. A setting of 10 to 60 seconds issuggested.

SQ TR EN can be set to YES or NO, depending onthe generator tripping strategy used.


motoring power22000 1000

CT RATIO VT RATIOwatts

=22000 1000

1600 157.5 watts

= 87.3 watts

=×

××

×

set REV PWR= ×05 87 3. . (32 - 1 & 32 - 2)= 43.6 watts

set TL1= 2 or 30 sec. depending on SQ TR EN setting.

set TL2= 30 seconds

Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint(51V)

Algorithm:

( ) ( )T

K

I /I V /V 1seconds

PU NOM

=÷ −

T = Operating time.

K = time factor (TIME FAC).

I/IPU = current in multiple of IPU (PICKUP).

( )V 3 ph. ground voltage for wye VT's (Note 2)

= phase - phase voltage for delta VT's (Note 2)

= −

VNOM = Nominal Voltage (NOM VOLT)

1. Time T is computed individually for each phase.2. See Table 2-2 for the restraint voltages used cor-

responding to phase currents for differentPHASE designations (setting # 109) and VTCONN (setting # 116).

3. If the quantity (V/VNOM)<0.3 then 0.3 is used asits value in the equation.

4. If the quantity ( ) ( )[ ]I / I V / V 65.5PU NOM÷ > then65.5 is used as its value in the equation.

5. Reset Time: Linear reset with maximum of 1.4seconds.

Table 2-2: Restraint Voltages used by Function 51VCurr Restraint Voltages

Phase→VT →

ABCWye

ABCDelta

ACBWye

ACBDelta

IA VA VAB VA VAC

IB VB VBC VB VBA

IC VC VCA VC VCB

Characteristics: Figures 2-8 to 2-11 show the curvesfor selected values of K & Voltage Restraint. Thecurve for any combination of K and Restraint Volt-age can be derived, using the above algorithm.

This function should be set to coordinate with thepower system protective relays used at the generat-ing station. Also the PICKUP setting should be asafe margin above the expected maximum load onthe machine. Refer to the Accidental Energization(AE) section for additional considerations regard-ing the 51V PICKUP setting.


set PICKUP =1.75 X generator rated load current=1.75 X 4.25=7.5 amperes secondary

TIME FAC K should be selected to back up the re-lays on transmission lines out of the generating sta-tion. As the information about line relays is notknown, let us set the TIME FAC such that the oper-ate time of 51V for a 3-phase fault on the high sideof the GSU is about 0.75 second. For simplicity,power system contribution to the fault is not consid-ered in the following calculations.

Impedance to fault = 21.6 10211.765

200+ ×

= 21.6 + 10.6= 32.2% at machine base

Gen. contribution = 4.25/0.322= 13.2 amperes secondary


2-14

Multiple of PICKUP = 13.2/7.5= 1.76

Gen. terminal volt. = 1810.632.2

×= 5.93 KV

% Restraint = 5.9318

100×= 32.9 %

TIME FAC (K) = ( )0.75 1.76 0.329 1 × ÷ −= 0.985 or higher

set TIME FAC = 1.0

Stator Ground Fault (64G-1)

Algorithm: 64G-1 operates if following condition ismet:

V PICKUP for time TL4 secondsN1 ≥ >VN1= Neutral voltage of fundamental frequency.

PICKUP = 64G-1 pickup setting.

TL4 = timer TL4 setting.

PICKUP of 64G-1 should be set with a safe marginabove the highest voltage (fundamental frequency)expected at the generator neutral under normal op-erating conditions. Timer TL4 should be set with asafe margin above the longest clearing time forpower system faults that are outside of the generatorprotection zone.

For the sample generator system,set PICKUP = 5.0 voltsset TL4 = 1 second or higher

Stator Ground Fault (64G-2)

Algorithm: 64G-2 operates when the following con-dition is met:

( )V

V / 3 V0.15 for time > TL5 seconds

V = Third harmonic voltage at generator neutral.

V = Third harmonic voltage at generator terminals.

TL5 = timer TL5 setting.

N3

P3 N3

N3

P3

+≤

The only setting required for this optional functionis timer TL5 to provide a short delay for security ofthe function.


set TL5 = 0.10 second.

Stator Ground Fault (27TN)

Algorithm: 27TN operates when the following con-ditions are met (see Figure 1-10 for logic diagram):

VN3 < 27TN PICKUP & V1 > 25V for time > TL20 sec.

VN3 = Third harmonic voltage at generator neutral.V1 = Positive sequence voltage at generator terminals.TL20 = Timer TL20 setting.

The PICKUP should be set as sensitive as the VN3

characteristic of the generator allows without loss ofsecurity. A flexible window of power can be estab-lished to enhance security of 27TN. For example,let us assume that the available VN3 is below 27TNpickup for power outputs in the range of 50 to 80watts. FORPWR-L and FORPWR-H settings whichprovide the flexible window can be set at 47 and 85watts (based on margin of about 5%) respectively toinhibit the function between the limits. This func-tion can also be blocked when the generator is off-line, refer to setting #2501.

Overexcitation Alarm (Volts/Hertz: 24A)

This function is intended to alarm prior to a 24Ttrip, so that an operator can take corrective action.The PICKUP setting should be below the continu-ous Volt/Hz rating of the generator or step-up trans-former, whichever is lower. Timer TL6 should beset to minimize the nuisance alarms.

For the sample generator system assume allowableover V/Hz of 10%.set PICKUP = 1 + (90% of 10%) per unit

= 1.09 per unitset TL6 = 2 seconds.

Overexcitation Trip (Volts/Hertz: 24T)

Algorithm:

( ) ( ){ }[ ]( ) ( ){ }[ ]

( ) ( ){ }[ ]

TPU V F

PU V F

TPU V F

NOM S

NOM S

NOM S

11

1

31

=K

V / F seconds

T2 =K

V / F seconds

=K

V / F seconds

T4 = K seconds

2

0.5

÷ × −

÷ × −

÷ × −

/

/

/


2-15

T1= Operating time for CURVE #1 (see Figure 2-12)T2= Operating time for CURVE #2 (see Figure 2-13)T3= Operating time for CURVE #3 (see Figure 2-14)T4= Operating time for CURVE #4 - characteristic

of curve #4 is definite time providing the oper-ating time equal to K seconds if

( ) ( ){ }V F PU V FNOM S/ /> ×

K = Time factor (TIME FAC)VNOM = nominal voltage (NOM VOLT)FS = system frequency (SYSFREQ)PU = V/Hz pickup (INV PU)

1. Algorithm is processed separately for each phase.2. V and VNOM values used are phase-ground voltages

for wye connected VT's, however phase-phasevoltages are used if the VT's are delta connected.Table 2-3 shows the voltages used by each of thethree phases for different phase designations(setting # 109) and VT connections (setting #116).

Table 2-3: Voltages used by Function 24T

Phase Voltages

PHASE →VT →

ABCWye

ABCDelta

ACBWye

ACBDelta

A VA VAB VA VAB

B VB VBC VB VBC

C VC VCA VC VCA

3. Reset time: Linear reset with maximum time =RESET setting.

This function should be set with a safe margin be-low the excitation capability of the generator orstep-up transformer, whichever is lower. The follow-ing example is based on the traditional criteria of 45seconds operating time at V/Hz from 1.1 to 1.18 perunit; however, actual excitation capability curvesshould be obtained for the generator and the trans-former to take full advantage of the inverse charac-teristic of this function. RESET time should be setto match the cooling characteristic of the protectedequipment (if known). If the reset characteristic isnot available, setting in the range of 0 to 50 secondsmay be used.

For the sample generator system,let us use CURVE #4 (definite time) and operat-ing time of 45 seconds.set INV PU = 1.10 per unitset TIME FAC = 45 seconds

set INST PU = 1.18 per unitset TL7 = 2 secondsset RESET = 30 seconds

Overvoltage (59)

Algorithm:

( )T1K

V / V 1 seconds

1 PU

=−

T2= K secondsT3= no intentional time delay

T1= Operating time for CURVE#1 (see Fig. 2-15)T2= Operating time for CURVE#2 (characteristic

of the optional curve #2 is definite time pro-viding the operating time equal to K secondsif V1 > VPU.

T3= Operating time of optional instantaneousfunction if V1 > VIPU.

K = time factor (TIME FAC).V1 = positive-sequence voltage (phase-phase).VPU = overvoltage pickup (setting #1503).VIPU =instantaneous overvoltage pickup INST PU.

Reset Time: Linear reset (1.4 seconds maximum)

Characteristics: Figure 2-15 shows the curve #1 forselected values of K. The curve for any other Ksetting can be derived using the above algorithm.

This function should be set with a safe margin be-low the overvoltage capability of the protectedequipment. Function 59 can provide backup tofunction 24T.

For the sample generator system, set 59 using crite-ria similar to 24T settings except with lower sensi-tivity and higher operating time.

Set VPU = 1.1 X NOM VOLT= 1.1 X 114.3= 126 volts

For determining time factor K (assuming CURVE#1 is used), let us use an operating time of about45 seconds at 115% of PICKUP voltage.

Voltage (V) = 1.15 X 126 = 144.9 volts

Time factor K = 45 144.9126

1−

= 6.75


2-16

Undervoltage Cutoff of 81

UVCUTOFF can be set over the range of 35 to 99 %of the nominal voltage (NOM VOLT). This settingcan be used to block the frequency functions fromoperating during start-up conditions until near-normal generator field is applied and set voltage isgenerated.

Under Frequency (81-U)

There are either two or four under frequency func-tions included in the DGP system depending on themodel. Each of the functions can be set (SET PNT)over the range of 40.00 to 65.00 Hz, with a time de-lay of 0.1 to 999.9 seconds for 81-1U and 0.05 to99.99 seconds for the other(s). The actual settingswill depend on the protection and operating phi-losophies of the individual user.

Over Frequency (81-O)

There are either two or four over frequency func-tions included in the DGP system depending on themodel. Each of the functions can be set (SET PNT)over the range of 45.00 to 79.99 Hz, with a time de-lay of 0.05 to 99.99 seconds. The actual settings willdepend on the protection and operating philoso-phies of the individual user.

Digital Input (DI)

The SELBKDI1 setting determines blocking actionby digital input DI1 (Generator off-line) when it isenergized. It can be set to 0 - 9 depending on theprotection functions to be blocked during the start-up. Table 2-4 describes the different blocking ac-tions:

Table 2-4: DI1 Blocking Configuration Look-up Table

SELBKDI1 Functions Disabled (X) by DI181 32 64G2/27TNφ VTFF

NO BLK (0) - - - -BLK #1 (1) X - - XBLK #2 (2) X - X -BLK #3 (3) X - X XBLK #4 (4) X X - -BLK #5 (5) - X - XBLK #6 (6) X X - XBLK #7 (7) - X X XBLK #8 (8) X - - -BLK #9 (9) X X X X

φ Refer to Nomenclature Guide for available functions.

Note that, for DGP***ABA, some of the SELBKDI1settings are functionally redundant; any one of suchsettings can be used to obtain the specified func-tionality.

An appropriate combination of functions 81, 32,64G2, 27TN and VTFF should be blocked duringstart-up (generator off-line) as required. For exam-ple, to prevent nuisance operation, SELBKDI1 maybe set as follows:

* BLK #6 to block 81, 32 and VTFF for cross com-pound machine.

* BLK #8 to block 81 if generator field is appliedat speed lower than the speed corresponding tolowest 81U set point.

* BLK #9 to block all four functions for gas tur-bine generator with static start.

The DI3 TRIP & ALARM and the DI4 TRIP &ALARM settings can be used to operate any or all ofthe Trip (94G-94G3) or Alarm (74A-74D) relays. Ifthe settings are selected, energizing the correspond-ing digital input will cause the appropriate Trip andAlarm relay to operate after time delay if applicable.

DI6 FUNC can be set to 0 (EXTVTFF) or 1(DISPROT) to configure the DI6 input. If set to 0(EXTVTFF), the DI6 is configured to receive anexternal VTFF signal. If set to 1 (DISPROT), theDI6 is configured to disable all protection functionsas long as the input signal is present. It should beset to 0 (EXTVTFF) if the input DI6 is not used.

Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure(VTFF)

VTFF can be set to either 0 (DISABLE) or 1(ENABLE) as desired. It is recommended to setVTFF=1 (ENABLE) if the external VTFF input(DI6) is not used. If the external VTFF input isused, the VTFF setting will depend on user prefer-ence.

Accidental Energization (AE)

AE ARM can be set to either 0 (AND) or 1 (OR) asdesired. If it is set to 0 (AND), the logic will bearmed when the positive sequence voltage V1<30volts AND the generator is off-line. If it is set to 1(OR), the logic will be armed when the voltageV1<30 volts OR the generator is off-line. The setting


2-17

of 0 (AND) is recommended. However, if both ofthe following conditions apply, it must be set to 1(OR) for effective arming of the logic.

1. The generator system includes a generatordisconnect device (breaker or switch), AND

2. The VT's are connected on the power systemside of the disconnect device.

As the pickup flag of function 51V is used for instan-taneous overcurrent signal in the Accidental Ener-gization logic (Figure 1-1), the following additionalcriteria should be used in setting the 51V PICKUP.

The 51V PICKUP (setting # 1003) should be setwith a safe margin above ILMAX, where ILMAX is an ex-pected maximum load current of the machine. IfAE ARM is set to 1 (OR) and simultaneous loss of allthree phase voltages is likely, the PICKUP should beset with a safe margin above 3.33 X ILMAX.

Note that function AE will be effectively disabled iffunction 51V is disabled by setting both TRIP andALARM codes (setting # 1001 & 1002) to 0000.This is in addition to the normal way of disablingfunction AE by setting its TRIP and ALARM codes(setting # 2701 & 2702) to 0000.

For the sample generator system,set AE ARM = 0 (AND)

Ground Overcurrent (51GN)

Algorithm:

( )Operating Time T =

K

I /I 1seconds

NR PU −K = time factor (TIME FAC).INR = Neutral current (fundamental frequency)IPU = PICKUP current settingReset Time: Linear reset (1.4 sec. maximum)

Characteristics: Figures 2-16 show the curves for se-lected values of K. The curve for any other valueof K can be derived using the above algorithm.

PICKUP of 51GN should be set with a safe marginabove the highest neutral current (fundamentalfrequency) expected under normal operating condi-tions. TIME FAC should be set to coordinate withother protective devices for power system faults thatare outside of the generator protection zone.

For the sample generator system, Function 51GN isnot usable, due to the high resistance groundingand high CT ratio for the function.

Set both TRIP and ALARM to 0000 each to dis-able the function.

Undervoltage (27)

Algorithm:

( )T1=K

V / V 1 seconds

T2 = K secondsPU 1 −

T1 = operating time for CURVE #1 (Fig. 2-17)T2 = operating time for CURVE#2 (characteristic

of curve #2 is definite time providing the op-erating time equal to K seconds if V1 < VPU)

V1 = positive-sequence voltage (phase-phase).VPU = undervoltage function threshold (PICKUP).Reset Time: Linear reset (1.4 seconds maximum)

The algorithm is NOT processed if input DI1(Generator off-line) is present.

Characteristics: Figure 2-17 shows the curve #1 forselected values of K. The curve for any other K set-ting can be derived using the above algorithm.

This optional function can be used to isolate thegenerator from the utility system for an undervolt-age condition. CURVE #, PICKUP, and TIME FACshould be set to override voltage dips caused bynormal power system faults.

For the sample generator system, 27 can be set:CURVE# = 2 (Definite Time)PICKUP = 102V (<90% of NOM VOLT of 114.3V)TIME FAC = 1.0 second


2-18

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

IS Amperes

I R A

mpe

res

DGP/87G

IR IS

GBUS

Figure 2-2 Typical Characteristics of Function 87G with K1=1% and PICKUP=0.3 amp.

IS

Gen. ToBus

IS

Bus ToGen.

Margin ForCT Error

Margin ForCT Error

External FaultNO CT Error

(IR = IS)

TRIP AREA FORINTERNAL FAULTS


2-19

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

IS Amperes

I R A

mpe

res

DGP/87G

IR IS

GBUS


IS

Gen. ToBus

IS

Bus ToGen.

Margin ForCT Error

Margin ForCT Error

External FaultNO CT Error

(IR = IS)



2-20

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

IS Amperes

I R A

mpe

res

DGP/87G

IR IS

GBUS


IS

Gen. ToBus

IS

Bus ToGen.

Margin ForCT Error

Margin ForCT Error External Fault

NO CT Error(IR = IS)



2-21

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

IS Amperes

I R A

mpe

res

DGP/87G

IR IS

GBUS

Figure 2-5 Typical Characteristics of Function 87G with K1=10% & PICKUP=0.3 amp.

IS

Gen. ToBus

IS

Bus ToGen.

Margin ForCT Error

Margin ForCT Error External Fault

NO CT Error(IR = IS)



2-22

0.1

1.0

10.0

100.0

1000.0

10000.0

0.01 0.1 1 10

Negative Sequence Current / Rated Current

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Figure 2-6 Time-Current Characteristic of Function 46T

Time FactorK

40

30

20

10

5

2


2-23

C1C2

40-1

40-2

R1

R2

Zb

Xd

X'd/2R

X

C1 = Center of 40-1 = (Zb + X'd)/2

R1 = Radius of 40-1 = Zb/2

C2 = Center of 40-2 = (Xd + X'd)/2

R2 = Radius of 40-2 = Xd/2

Zb = Base impedance of the machineX'd = Transient reactance of the machineXd = Synchronous reactance of the machine

Figure 2-7 Mho Characteristics and Setting Criteria for Functions 40-1 and 40-2


2-24

0.01

0.1

1

10

0.1 1 10

Multiple of Pickup Setting

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Figure 2-8 Time-Current Characteristics of Function 51V for 0-30% restraint(30% PICKUP)

Time Factor

K4

3

2

1

0.5

0.25


2-25

0.01

0.1

1

10

0.1 1 10


Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Figure 2-9 Time-Current Characteristics of Function 51V for 50% restraint(50% PICKUP)

Time FactorK

4

3

2

1

0.5

0.25


2-26

0.01

0.1

1

10

0.1 1 10


Tim

e (S

econ

ds)


Time FactorK

4

3

2

1

0.5

0.25


2-27

0.01

0.1

1

10

0.1 1 10


Tim

e (S

econ

ds)


Time Factor

K4

3

2

1

0.5

0.25


2-28

0.1

1

10

100

1 1.1 1.2 1.3

Multiple of "INV PU"

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Figure 2-12 Time Characteristics of Function 24T (CURVE 1)

Time FactorK10

8

6

4

2

1

0.5


2-29

0.1

1

10

100

1 1.1 1.2 1.3


Tim

e (S

econ

ds)


Time FactorK10

8

6

4

2

1

0.5


2-30

0.1

1

10

100

1 1.1 1.2 1.3


Tim

e (S

econ

ds)


10

8

6

4

2

1

0.5

KTime Factor


2-31

0.1

1

10

100

1000

100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200

Percent of Pickup

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Figure 2-15 Time Voltage Characteristics of Function 59

Time FactorK10

7

5

4

3

2

1

0.5


2-32

0.1

1

10

1 10 100


Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Figure 2-16 Time-Current Characteristics of Function 51GN

Time FactorK

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1


2-33

0.1

1

10

1 10 100

Percent of Pickup

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Figure 2-17 Time Voltage Characteristics of Function 27 (Curve 1)

Time FactorK 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2


2-34

Table 2-5: Settings Form - DGP***AAA Protection System(Page 1 of 4)

Location: Generator Number:

Relay Model Number: DGP _ _ _ A A A PROM Version Number: V _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ F

SETTING # DESCRIPTION SETTING

Configuration: CONFIG101 UNITID Unit ID number102 SYSFREQ System Frequency Hz103 SEL TVM Select Trip Voltage Monitoring 104 SEL TCM Select Trip Current Monitoring 105 SELPRIM Select Primary/Secondary units 106 CT RATIO Current Transformer Ratio107 VT RATIO Voltage Transformer Ratio 108 COMMPORT Communications Port 109 PHASE Phase Rotation 110 TIMESYNC Time Synchronizing source 111 NUM FLTS Number of Fault events stored 112 PREFLT Number of prefault cycles stored Cycle113 OSC TRIG External oscillography trigger114 NOM VOLT Nominal Voltage of generator Volt115 RATEDCUR Rated Current of generator Amp116 VT CONN Type of VT connection

Stator Differential: 87G201 TRIP Configure trip outputs 202 ALARM Configure alarm outputs203 K1 K factor %204 PICKUP Pickup level Amp

Current Unbalance -Alarm: 46A301 ALARM Configure alarm outputs302 PICKUP Pickup current (Negative sequence) Amp303 TL14 Timer TL14 setting Sec

Current Unbalance -Trip: 46T401 TRIP Configure trip outputs402 ALARM Configure alarm outputs403 PICKUP Pickup current (Negative sequence) Amp404 K2 K factor Sec

Loss Of Excitation Supervision: 40501 SELV2SUP Select V2 supervision of 40

Loss Of Excitation Zone 1: 40-1601 TRIP Configure trip outputs602 ALARM Configure alarm outputs603 CENTER Center of characteristic Ohm604 RADIUS Radius of characteristic Ohm605 TL12 Timer TL12 setting Sec


2-35





Loss Of Excitation Zone 2: 40-2701 TRIP Configure trip outputs702 ALARM Configure alarm outputs703 CENTER Center of characteristic Ohm704 RADIUS Radius of characteristic Ohm705 TL13 Timer TL13 setting SecAnti-Motoring: 32-1801 TRIP Configure trip outputs802 ALARM Configure alarm outputs803 SQ TR EN Enable sequential trip804 REV PWR Reverse power pickup Watt805 TL1 Timer TL1 setting SecAnti-Motoring: 32-2901 TRIP Configure trip outputs902 ALARM Configure alarm outputs903 REV PWR Reverse power pickup Watt904 TL2 Timer TL2 setting SecOvercurrent With Voltage Retraint: 51V1001 TRIP Configure trip outputs1002 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1003 PICKUP Pickup current Amp1004 TIME FAC Time factor SecStator Ground - Zone 1: 64G11101 TRIP Configure trip outputs1102 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1103 PICKUP Pickup voltage Volt1104 TL4 Timer TL4 setting SecStator Ground - Zone 2: 64G21201 TRIP Configure trip outputs1202 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1203 TL5 Timer TL5 setting SecOverexcitation - Alarm: 24A1301 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1302 PICKUP Pickup (V/Hz) Per Unit1303 TL6 Timer TL6 setting Sec


2-36





Overexcitation - Trip: 24T1401 TRIP ON Configure trip outputs (on-line)1402 TRIP OFF Configure trip outputs (off-line)1403 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1404 CURVE # Curve number (Inverse characteristic)1405 INV PU Pickup - V/Hz (Inverse characteristic) Per Unit1406 TIME FAC Time factor Sec1407 INST PU Pickup - V/Hz (Instantaneous) Per Unit1408 TL7 Timer TL7 setting Sec1409 RESET Reset time Sec

Overvoltage: 591501 TRIP Configure trip outputs1502 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1503 PICKUP Inverse function pickup voltage (Positive sequence) Volt1504 TIME FAC Time factor Sec

Undervoltage Cutoff of 811601 UVCUTOFF Undervoltage cutoff level for functions 81 Volt

Underfrequency Set Point 1: 81-1U1701 TRIP Configure trip outputs1702 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1703 SET PNT Set point Hz1704 TL8 Timer TL8 setting Sec




Overfrequency Set Point 1: 81-1O2101 TRIP Configure trip outputs2102 ALARM Configure alarm outputs2103 SET PNT Set point Hz2104 TL15 Timer TL15 setting Sec


2-37








Digital Input: DIG INP2501 SELBKDI1 Select blocking action by input DI12502 DI3 TRIP Configure trip outputs2503 DI3 ALRM Configure alarm outputs2504 DI4 TRIP Configure trip outputs2505 DI4 ALRM Configure alarm outputs

Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure: VTFF2601 VTFF Enable/Disable VTFF

Accidental Energization: AE2701 TRIP Configure trip outputs2702 ALARM Configure alarm outputs2703 AE ARM Arming logic, Accidental Energization


2-38

Table 2-6: Settings Form - DGP***ABA Protection System(Page 1 of 3)


Relay Model Number: DGP _ _ _ A B A PROM Version Number: V _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ G


Configuration: CONFIG101 UNITID Unit ID number102 SYSFREQ System Frequency Hz103 SEL TVM Select Trip Voltage Monitoring 104 SEL TCM Select Trip Current Monitoring 105 SELPRIM Select Primary/Secondary units 106 CT RATIO Current Transformer Ratio (Phase)107 VT RATIO Voltage Transformer Ratio 108 COMMPORT Communications Port 109 PHASE Phase Rotation 110 TIMESYNC Time Synchronizing source 111 NUM FLTS Number of Fault events stored 114 NOM VOLT Nominal Voltage of generator Volt115 RATEDCUR Rated Current of generator Amp116 VT CONN Type of VT connection 117 NCTRATIO Current Transformer Ratio (Neutral)








2-39





Anti-Motoring: 32-1801 TRIP Configure trip outputs802 ALARM Configure alarm outputs803 SQ TR EN Enable sequential trip804 REV PWR Reverse power pickup Watt805 TL1 Timer TL1 setting Sec

Overcurrent With Voltage Retraint: 51V1001 TRIP Configure trip outputs1002 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1003 PICKUP Pickup current Amp1004 TIME FAC Time factor Sec

Stator Ground - Zone 1: 64G11101 TRIP Configure trip outputs1102 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1103 PICKUP Pickup voltage Volt1104 TL4 Timer TL4 setting Sec

Overexcitation - Alarm: 24A1301 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1302 PICKUP Pickup (V/Hz) Per Unit1303 TL6 Timer TL6 setting Sec

Overexcitation - Trip: 24T1401 TRIP ON Configure trip outputs (on-line)1402 TRIP OFF Configure trip outputs (off-line)1403 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1404 CURVE # Curve number (Inverse characteristic)1405 INV PU Pickup - V/Hz (Inverse characteristic) Per Unit1406 TIME FAC Time factor Sec1407 INST PU Pickup - V/Hz (Instantaneous) Per Unit1408 TL7 Timer TL7 setting Sec1409 RESET Reset time Sec

Overvoltage: 591501 TRIP Configure trip outputs1502 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1503 PICKUP Inverse function pickup voltage (Positive sequence) Volt1504 TIME FAC Time factor Sec1505 CURVE # Curve number (1-Inverse, 2-Def. Time)

Undervoltage Cutoff of 811601 UVCUTOFF Undervoltage cutoff level for functions 81 Volt



2-40








Digital Input: DIG INP2501 SELBKDI1 Select blocking action by input DI12502 DI3 TRIP Configure trip outputs2503 DI3 ALRM Configure alarm outputs2505 DI4 TRIP Configure trip outputs2506 DI4 ALRM Configure alarm outputs2508 DI6 FUNC Define DI6 Function



Ground Overcurrent: 51GN2801 TRIP Configure trip outputs2802 ALARM Configure alarm outputs2803 PICKUP Pickup current Amp2804 TIME FAC Time factor Sec

Undervoltage: 272901 TRIP Configure trip outputs2902 ALARM Configure alarm outputs2903 PICKUP Pickup voltage (Positive sequence) Volt2904 TIME FAC Time factor Sec2905 CURVE # Curve number (1-Inverse, 2-Def. Time)


2-41

Table 2-7: Settings Form - DGP***ACA Protection System(Page 1 of 5)


Relay Model Number: DGP _ _ _ A C A PROM Version Number: V _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ D


Configuration: CONFIG101 UNITID Unit ID number102 SYSFREQ System Frequency Hz103 SEL TVM Select Trip Voltage Monitoring 104 SEL TCM Select Trip Current Monitoring 105 SELPRIM Select Primary/Secondary units 106 CT RATIO Current Transformer Ratio (Phase)107 VT RATIO Voltage Transformer Ratio 108 COMMPORT Communications Port 109 PHASE Phase Rotation 110 TIMESYNC Time Synchronizing source 111 NUM FLTS Number of Fault events stored 112 PREFLT Number of prefault cycles stored Cycle113 OSC TRIG External oscillography trigger114 NOM VOLT Nominal Voltage of generator Volt115 RATEDCUR Rated Current of generator Amp116 VT CONN Type of VT connection 117 NCTRATIO Current Transformer Ratio (Neutral)







2-42






Anti-Motoring: 32-1801 TRIP Configure trip outputs802 ALARM Configure alarm outputs803 SQ TR EN Enable sequential trip804 REV PWR Reverse power pickup Watt805 TL1 Timer TL1 setting Sec

Anti-Motoring: 32-2901 TRIP Configure trip outputs902 ALARM Configure alarm outputs903 REV PWR Reverse power pickup Watt904 TL2 Timer TL2 setting Sec

Overcurrent With Voltage Retraint: 51V1001 TRIP Configure trip outputs1002 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1003 PICKUP Pickup current Amp1004 TIME FAC Time factor Sec

Stator Ground - Zone 1: 64G11101 TRIP Configure trip outputs1102 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1103 PICKUP Pickup voltage Volt1104 TL4 Timer TL4 setting Sec

Stator Ground - Zone 2: 64G21201 TRIP Configure trip outputs1202 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1203 TL5 Timer TL5 setting Sec

Overexcitation - Alarm: 24A1301 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1302 PICKUP Pickup (V/Hz) Per Unit1303 TL6 Timer TL6 setting Sec


2-43





Overexcitation - Trip: 24T1401 TRIP ON Configure trip outputs (on-line)1402 TRIP OFF Configure trip outputs (off-line)1403 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1404 CURVE # Curve number (Inverse characteristic)1405 INV PU Pickup - V/Hz (Inverse characteristic) Per Unit1406 TIME FAC Time factor Sec1407 INST PU Pickup - V/Hz (Instantaneous) Per Unit1408 TL7 Timer TL7 setting Sec1409 RESET Reset time SecOvervoltage: 591501 TRIP Configure trip outputs1502 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1503 INV PICKUP Inverse function pickup voltage (Positive sequence) Volt1504 TIME FAC Time factor Sec1505 CURVE # Curve number (1-Inverse, 2-Def. Time)1506 INST PU Instantaneous Pickup voltage (Positive sequence) VoltUndervoltage Cutoff of 811601 UVCUTOFF Undervoltage cutoff level for functions 81 VoltUnderfrequency Set Point 1: 81-1U1701 TRIP Configure trip outputs1702 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1703 SET PNT Set point Hz1704 TL8 Timer TL8 setting SecUnderfrequency Set Point 1: 81-2U1801 TRIP Configure trip outputs1802 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1803 SET PNT Set point Hz1804 TL9 Timer TL9 setting SecUnderfrequency Set Point 1: 81-3U1901 TRIP Configure trip outputs1902 ALARM Configure alarm outputs1903 SET PNT Set point Hz1904 TL10 Timer TL10 setting SecUnderfrequency Set Point 1: 81-4U2001 TRIP Configure trip outputs2002 ALARM Configure alarm outputs2003 SET PNT Set point Hz2004 TL11 Timer TL11 setting SecOverfrequency Set Point 1: 81-1O2101 TRIP Configure trip outputs2102 ALARM Configure alarm outputs2103 SET PNT Set point Hz2104 TL15 Timer TL15 setting Sec


2-44








Digital Input: DIG INP2501 SELBKDI1 Select blocking action by input DI12502 DI3 TRIP Configure trip outputs2503 DI3 ALRM Configure alarm outputs2504 DI3 TMR Pickup delay, DI3 timer Sec2505 DI4 TRIP Configure trip outputs2506 DI4 ALRM Configure alarm outputs2507 DI4 TMR Pickup delay, DI4 timer Sec2508 DI6 FUNC Define DI6 Function



Ground Overcurrent: 51GN2801 TRIP Configure trip outputs2802 ALARM Configure alarm outputs2803 PICKUP Pickup current Amp2804 TIME FAC Time factor Sec

Undervoltage: 272901 TRIP Configure trip outputs2902 ALARM Configure alarm outputs2903 PICKUP Pickup voltage (Positive sequence) Volt2904 TIME FAC Time factor Sec2905 CURVE # Curve number (1-Inverse, 2-Def. Time)


2-45





Undervoltage - Third Harmonic: 27TN3001 TRIP Configure trip outputs3002 ALARM Configure alarm outputs3003 PICKUP Pickup voltage (Third Harmonic at generator neutral) Volt3004 TL20 Timer TL20 setting Sec3005 FORPWR-L Lower limit of Forward Power window Watt3006 FORPWR-H Upper limit of Forward Power window Watt


3-1

Chapter 3 - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 3 - HARDWARE DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................................... 3-1TABLE OF FIGURES............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1CAUTION .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-23-1 CASE ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Construction........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-2

Electrical Connections and Internal Wiring......................................................................................................................... 3-2

Identification....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3-2 CIRCUIT BOARD MODULES......................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Basic Construction .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-3

Identification....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

3-3 XTM TEST PLUGS......................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

Description.......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

Terminal Designation.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

XTM Test-Circuit Connections ............................................................................................................................................ 3-3

Test Plug Insertion.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-3

3-4 RECEIVING, HANDLING & STORAGE......................................................................................................................... 3-43-5 INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-4

Environment........................................................................................................................................................................ 3-4

Mounting............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-4

External Connections .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-4

External Connections Test................................................................................................................................................... 3-4

3-6 SURGE GROUND CONNECTIONS................................................................................................................................ 3-4

TABLE OF FIGURES

Figure 3-1 (0215B8477) DGP Outline Drawing ………………..…….……………………………………………………….. 3-5Figure 3-2 Front View of Models with Test Connection Plugs ………………………………………………………………..3-6Figure 3-3 Front View of Models without Test Connection Plugs ……..…………………………………………………….. 3-7Figure 3-4 (0171C8782) Rear View of DGP ……………….…..…….………………………………………………………..3-8Figure 3-5 (0286A4911 Sh.8) MMI Module ……………….…..…….………………………………………………………..3-9Figure 3-6 (0286A4911 Sh.10) Power Supply Module …….…..…….………………………………………………………..3-10

GEK-100666 Chapter 3 - Hardware Description

3-2

CAUTIONPower down the relay by removing one of the con-nection plugs or turn both power switches to OFFbefore removng or inserting modules. Failure to doso can permanently damage the relay.

3-1 CASE ASSEMBLYConstruction

The case that houses the electronic modules is con-structed from an aluminum alloy. It consists of amain frame with side mounting brackets, a frontcover and a rear cover.

The front cover, comprised of a metal frame withplate glass, is pivoted on the top and is opened fromthe bottom by way of two spring-loaded latches. Thedoor is constrained from coming off by tabs that re-quire the door to be unlatched and lifted slightly inorder to be removed. A pushbutton extender in-stalled into the plate glass makes it possible to clearthe display without removing the front cover.

The rear cover supports terminal blocks that are usedin making external connections to the case. Themodules are mounted vertically inside the case, andthey are supported by sockets on the mother boardwithin the case. In addition to providing this me-chanical support, the sockets also offer the means ofmaking the electrical connection to the modules.The modules are further restrained inside the caseby the front cover.

Proper alignment of the module with respect to thesocket is maintained by slotted guides, one guideabove and one guide beneath each module, with theexception of the magnetics module, MGM and MMImodules, which require two guides above and twobeneath.

Electrical Connections and InternalWiring

As mentioned earlier, electrical connections aremade to the case through eight terminal blocksmounted on the rear cover plate. Each block con-tains 14 terminal points, which consist of a Number 6screw threaded into a flat contact plate. Each termi-nal is rated for a maximum of two connections. Ex-ceeding this will violate UL specifications for twowires per terminal.

Connection to the MGM module is made by meansof two connector sockets; an 8-contact current blockand a 104-pin signal block. The current block con-tacts are rated to handle current transformer (CT)secondary currents, and they are shorted upon re-moval of the MGM module.

Identification

The DGP system model number label is located onthe outside of the front cover, and on the right-handsidesheet inside the case. A marking strip indicatingthe name and position of every module in a case isincluded on the front center of the case. It is placedto be read when the front cover is removed. Figure 4-1 in the MODULES section shows the location of themodules.

The terminal blocks located on the rear cover plateare uniquely identified by a two-letter code that isfound directly beneath the outermost edge of eachterminal block. Also, the terminal points (1 through14) are identified by stamped numbers.

Connector PL1 is used for serial communication be-tween the DGP system and the PC/Modem. Connec-tor PL2 is used to output sequence of events (SOE) toa serial printer or a DEC100 for additional auxiliarycontacts output. PL3 is used for IRIG-B signal inputto the DGP systems. Note that on some models, thePL2 and PL3 connectors are not active due to theabsence of those options - see the Model Selectionguide for details.

3-2 CIRCUIT BOARD MODULESCAUTION

This relay contains electronic components that couldbe damaged by electrostatic discharge currents ifthose currents flow through certain terminals of thecomponents. The main source of electrostatic dis-charge currents is the human body, and the condi-tions of low humidity, carpeted floors and isolatingshoes are conducive to the generation of electro-static discharge currents. Where these conditionsexist, care should be exercised when removing andhandling the modules to make settings on the inter-nal switches. The persons handling the modulesshould make sure that their body charge has beendischarged, by touching some surface at ground po-tential before touching any of the components onthe modules.


3-3

Basic Construction

Each module consists of a printed-circuit board andfront panel. Two knobs are provided on the frontpanel for removing and inserting the module. Elec-trical connection is made by the 96 pins of the Euro-card connector located at the back of the board.

Identification

Each module has its own identification number,consisting of a three-letter code followed by a three-digit number. These are found at the bottom ofeach front panel.

3-3 XTM TEST PLUGSDescription

The XTM test plugs are designed specifically forpost-installation testing of the DGP system. As manyas four plugs can be used at one time; two XTM28L1(left-hand plugs) and two XTM28R1 (right-handplugs), each providing access to fourteen relay-sideand fourteen system-side points. The system-sidepoints are designated "S" and the relay-side pointsare designated "R". The plugs are keyed by the con-tact finger arrangement so that there may be no ac-cidental interchange between the left-hand andright-hand plugs.

The plugs are fitted with a sliding handle that swingsout to facilitate wiring to the terminals. The termi-nals consist of number 8 screws threaded into flatcontact plates. The handles each have a tab on theoutside edge to guide the wire dress of the test leads.

NOTENot all external connections to the DGP system arewired through the test receptacle.

Terminal Designation

The test receptacle and connection plugs are locatedon the lower unit to the extreme left and right-handpositions. The left hand plugs are labeled as TP1with terminals 1 through 28. The right hand plugsare labeled TP2 with terminals 1 through 28. Thesepoints are designated on the elementary diagrams asTP1-1 (See Figures 1-6 and 1-7 in the PRODUCTDESCRIPTION section.

The left-hand test plug (XTM28L1) terminals arelabeled 1R through 14R and 1S through 14S for the

relay side and system side, respectively, with the sys-tem side labeled in red. Similarly, the right-hand testplug (XTM28R1) terminals are labeled 15R through28R and 15S through 28S.

XTM Test-Circuit Connections

Test-circuit connections, designated as TP points inthe elementary diagrams, should be made to the re-lay side of the test plug. Where it is desired to useavailable system quantities for testing, e.g., DC con-trol power, jumpers may be inserted between the cor-responding system-side and relay-side test plug ter-minals. Appropriate precautions should be takenwhen working with station battery DC.

Connections should be made to the test plugs priorto insertion into the DGP system.

Test Plug Insertion

To remove power from the relay, remove at least oneof the connection plugs (see Figure 4-1).

To insert the test plugs, the two connection plugsmust first be removed. In so doing, electrical conti-nuity is broken between the power system and theDGP system for those signals that are wired throughthe test receptacle (refer to TP points on the elemen-tary diagram, Figures 1-6 & 1-7 in the PRODUCTDESCRIPTION section). For the terminals con-nected to the current-transformer secondaries, short-ing bars are included on the system side of the testreceptacle. These are clearly visible through thetransparent plastic face plate on the receptacle. Theshorting bars make contact before the connection-plug contacts break during removal, so that the CTsecondaries are never open-circuited.

Four test plugs may be inserted at the same time giv-ing access to all 56 terminals simultaneously. Other-wise, if using fewer than four test plugs, the remain-ing connection plugs may remain in the other recep-tacles.

When the test plugs are inserted into the receptacle,parts of the power system become isolated from theDGP system. Refer to the elementary diagram for theTP points associated with each of the test plugs.

WARNING

IT IS CRITICAL THAT JUMPERS BE INSERTED ONTHE SYSTEM-SIDE TEST PLUG TERMINALS THATARE CONNECTED TO THE CT SECONDARIES, AS


3-4

SHOWN IN FIGURE 1-6. IF THESE JUMPERS ARELEFT OUT, THE RESULTING HIGH VOLTAGESDEVELOPED PRESENT A SERIOUS HAZARD TOPERSONNEL AND MAY SEVERELY DAMAGEEQUIPMENT.

3-4 RECEIVING, HANDLING &STORAGE

Immediately upon receipt, the equipment should beunpacked and examined for any damage sustainedin transit. If damage resulting from rough handlingis evident, file a damage claim at once with thetransportation company and promptly notify thenearest GE Sales Office. If the equipment is not to beinstalled immediately, it should be stored indoors ina location that is dry and protected from dust, metal-lic chips, and severe atmospheric conditions.

3-5 INSTALLATIONEnvironment

The location should be clean and dry, free from dustand excessive vibration, and well lighted to facilitateinspection and testing.

Mounting

The DGP case has been designed for standard rackmounting. The case measures eight rack units (8RU) in height. Refer to Figure 3-1 for the outlineand mounting dimensions.

External Connections

External connections are made according to theelementary diagram, Figures 1-6 & 1-7 in thePRODUCT DESCRIPTION section. This is a generaldiagram incorporating all of the available options.Connection need not be made to those terminals as-sociated with options that will not be used.

External Connections Test

WARNING

THE DGP SYSTEM SHOULD BE DISABLED TOPREVENT TRIPPING OF THE CIRCUITBREAKERS UNTIL IT HAS BEEN DETERMINEDTHAT THE UNIT IS CONNECTED PROPERLY.THIS CAN BE DONE IN TWO WAYS. ONE IS TODE-ENERGIZE THE TRIP CIRCUIT CONNECTEDTO THE RELAY; THE OTHER IS TO DISABLETHE DGP OUTPUTS BY SETTING THE"DISABLE OUTPUTS" FUNCTION TO " YES"PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

An overall check of current transformer polarities,potential transformer polarities, and connections tothe DGP relay, can be made prior to placing the DGPsystem in service, by using the system voltages andload current while monitoring the MMI display forthe Present Values of the DGP system. Obtaining thepresent values of the DGP system can be done in twoways. One is to access the INF category on the MMIkeypad. Once the INF category is chosen use the UP-ARROW key to select the PRESENT VALUES menu.Scrolling through the present values will allow you todetermine if the relay is wired correctly. Anothermethod for finding the present values is to press theCLR key on the MMI and allow the DGP system toautomatically scroll through the present values.

3-6 SURGE GROUNDCONNECTIONS

CAUTIONTerminal BH14 must be tied to station ground, asshown in the elementary diagram Figures 1-6 & 1-7.The connection to the ground bus must be made asshort as possible, preferably 10 inches or less, usingNo.12 wire or larger.


3-5

Figure 3-1 (0215B8477) DGP Outline Drawing


3-6

FIG

UR

E 3

-2, F

RO

NT

VIE

W O

F M

OD

ELS

WIT

H T

ES

T C

ON

NE

CT

ION

PLU

GS

TR

IP A

BC

24T

ST

AT

US

LIG

HT

CO

MM

PS

1

87A

87B

87C

51V

51G

N2

7

24A

24B

24C

40-

14

0-2

64G

16

4G2

81-

U8

1-O

32

59

46

VT

FF

PS

2D

ITM

M1

SS

PA

NI

DA

PD

SP

TP

11-

14 T

P1

15-2

8M

GM

MG

M T

P2

1-14

TP

215

-28

SE

T

INF

AC

T

EN

D

1/Y 4 7

PR

T

2 5 8 0

3/N 6 9 .

CL

R

EN

T


3-7

FIG

UR

E 3

-3, F

RO

NT

VIE

W O

F M

OD

ELS

WIT

HO

UT

TE

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N P

LUG

S

TR

IP A

BC

24T

ST

AT

US

LIG

HT

CO

MM

PS

1P

S2

DIT

MM

1S

SP

AN

ID

AP

DS

P

MG

MM

GM

87A

87B

87C

51V

51G

N2

7

24A

24B

24C

40-

14

0-2

64G

16

4G2

81-

U8

1-O

32

59

46

PS

1

ON

OF

FO

FF

ON

PS

2

DC

CO

NT

RO

LV

OLT

AG

E

SE

T

INF

AC

T

EN

D

1/Y 4 7

PR

T

2 5 8 0

3/N 6 9 .

CL

R

EN

T


3-8

Figure 3-4 (0171C8782) Rear View of DGP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 141 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

PS2DC I INPUT

+ -


3-9

Figure 3-5 (0286A4911 Sh.8) MMI Module


3-10

Figure 3-6 (0286A4911 Sh.10) Power Supply


4-1

Chapter 4 - ACCEPTANCE TESTS

CHAPTER 4 - ACCEPTANCE TESTS.................................................................................................................................. 4-1

TABLE OF FIGURES............................................................................................................................................................. 4-2

CAUTION .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3

4-1 GENERAL....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3General Tests...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3Protection Functions........................................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4-2 TEST EQUIPMENT........................................................................................................................................................ 4-3

4-3 DRAWINGS AND REFERENCES................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4-4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING............................................................................................................................................ 4-4

4-5 REQUIRED SETTINGS.................................................................................................................................................. 4-4

4-6 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.......................................................................................................................................... 4-4

4-7 SETTING CHANGES...................................................................................................................................................... 4-4

4-8 ENTERING THE TEST MODE........................................................................................................................................ 4-5

4-9 EXITING THE TEST MODE .......................................................................................................................................... 4-5

4-10 USING DGP-LINK (OPTIONAL) ..................................................................................................................................... 4-5Hardware Setup................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6PC Software Setup............................................................................................................................................................... 4-6Relay Setup ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6Logging Into the Relay ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-7Setting Changes................................................................................................................................................................... 4-7Entering the Test Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-7Exiting the Test Mode.......................................................................................................................................................... 4-7

4-11 INITIAL TEST SETUP.................................................................................................................................................. 4-7

4-12 GENERAL RELAY TESTS........................................................................................................................................... 4-8T1-MMI Status and Display Testing .................................................................................................................................... 4-8

Status Check....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-8Warning Status.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-8Display Test........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-8

T2 - Digital Output Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-9T3 - Digital Input Tests........................................................................................................................................................ 4-9T4 - AC System Input Test .................................................................................................................................................4-10

4-13 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS........................................................................................................................................4-10T5- Generator Differential Test, 87G.................................................................................................................................4-11T6 - Current Unbalance Alarm, 46A..................................................................................................................................4-11T7 - Current Unbalance Trip, 46T.....................................................................................................................................4-11T8- Loss of Field Protection Zone 1, 40-1..........................................................................................................................4-11T9- Loss of Field Protection Zone 2, 40-2..........................................................................................................................4-12T10 - Anti-Motoring and Sequential Trip Supervision, 32-1...............................................................................................4-12T11 - Anti-Motoring, 32-2 .................................................................................................................................................4-13T12- Time Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint, 51V..........................................................................................................4-13T13 - Accidental Energization, AE ....................................................................................................................................4-13T14 - Stator Ground Zone 1, 64G1 ....................................................................................................................................4-14T15 - Stator Ground Zone 2, 64G2 ....................................................................................................................................4-14T16 - Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Alarm, 24A......................................................................................................................4-14T17 - Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Trip, 24T .........................................................................................................................4-14T18 - Positive Sequence Overvoltage, 59...........................................................................................................................4-15


4-2

T19- Underfrequency Unit#1, 81-1U..................................................................................................................................4-15T20- Underfrequency Unit#2, 81-2U..................................................................................................................................4-16T21- Underfrequency Unit#3, 81-3U..................................................................................................................................4-16T22- Underfrequency Unit#4, 81-4U..................................................................................................................................4-16T23 - Overfrequency Unit #1, 81-1O ..................................................................................................................................4-16T24 - Overfrequency Unit #2, 81-2O ..................................................................................................................................4-16T25 - Overfrequency Unit #3, 81-3O ..................................................................................................................................4-16T26 - Overfrequency Unit #4, 81-4O ..................................................................................................................................4-16T27 - Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure, VTFF.................................................................................................................4-17T28 - TOC Ground Overcurrent, 51GN..............................................................................................................................4-17T29 - Undervoltage, 27 ......................................................................................................................................................4-17T30 - 3rd Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage, 27TN ..............................................................................................................4-17

4-14 END OF TEST .............................................................................................................................................................4-18

TABLE OF FIGURES

FIGURE 4-1 DIGITAL OUTPUT TEST CONNECTIONS...................................................................................................................4-19FIGURE 4-2 DIGITAL INPUT TEST CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................................................4-20FIGURE 4-3 AC SYSTEM INPUT TEST CONNECTIONS.................................................................................................................4-21FIGURE 4-4 GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL TEST CONNECTIONS....................................................................................................4-22FIGURE 4-5 CURRENT UNBALANCE TEST CONNECTIONS...........................................................................................................4-23FIGURE 4-6 STANDARD FUNCTIONAL TEST CONNECTIONS........................................................................................................4-24FIGURE 4-7 STATOR GROUND TEST CONNECTIONS...................................................................................................................4-25FIGURE 4-8 STATOR GROUND TEST FOR 27TN FUNCTION.........................................................................................................4-26

GEK-100666 Chapter 4 - Acceptance Tests

4-3

CAUTIONPower Down the relay before removing or insertingmodules. Failure to do so can permanently damagethe relay.

4-1 GENERALThis section is a guide for testing the relay. It is notnecessary that the tests be performed for incominginspection. The relay has been tested at the factorywith automated test equipment. The DGP system isa digital relay controlled by "self checking" software.If a system failure is detected, it will be reportedthrough the MMI and remote communications.

The following tests include: Relay status self testand display and MMI self test. Tests of the protec-tion functions and measuring accuracy are also in-cluded and can be performed at the user's discre-tion. Protection functions that

end with an * are available on certain models only -see the DGP model list.

General Tests

T1 MMI Status and Display Tests (Self Tests)T2 Digital Output TestsT3 Digital Input TestsT4 AC System Input Test

Protection Functions

T5 Generator Differential, 87GT6 Current Unbalance Alarm, 46AT7 Current Unbalance Trip, 46TT8 Loss of Excitation, 40-1T9 Loss of Excitation, 40-2T10 Anti-Motoring, 32-1T11 Anti-Motoring, 32-2*T12 Time Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint, 51VT13 Accidental Energization, AET14 Stator Ground Zone1, 64G1T15 Stator Ground Zone2, 64G2*T16 Overexcitation (Volts/Hz) Alarm, 24AT17 Overexcitation (Volts/Hz) Trip, 24TT18 Overvoltage, 59T19 Underfrequency, 81-1UT20 Underfrequency, 81-2UT21 Underfrequency, 81-3U*T22 Underfrequency, 81-4U*T23 Overfrequency, 81-1OT24 Overfrequency, 81-2O

T25 Overfrequency, 81-3O*T26 Overfrequency, 81-4O*T27 Voltage Transformer Fuse FailureT28 TOC Ground Overcurrent, 51GN*T29 Undervoltage, 27*T30 3rd Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage, 27TN*

* Functions available in some models only.

4-2 TEST EQUIPMENT1. Three-phase source of voltage and current oper-

ating from 30 - 80 Hz, with capability to add 3rdharmonic voltage to the fundamental

2. DC voltage source (Power supply)3. Three AC voltmeters4. Three AC ammeters5. A continuity tester or Ohm meter6. A PC compatible computer with a serial and

mouse port7. An RS232 null modem cable to connect the PC to

the DGP system8. A Precision Timer for testing timed events.

The specific requirements of the equipment aregiven in the text of this section, and in the associ-ated circuit diagrams.

The three-phase AC sinusoidal voltage must be bal-anced and undistorted. Similarly, the DC powershould come from a "good" source with less than 5%ripple. A "good source" is one that is within thevoltage range shown in the SPECIFICATIONS sec-tion.

As an alternative, a three-phase electronic testsource may be used. In many cases, these devicesenable the test circuits to be simplified greatly.

4-3 DRAWINGS ANDREFERENCES

The following drawings should be used for refer-ence during testing. They are located in thePRODUCT DESCRIPTION (PD) and theCALCULATION OF SETTINGS (CS) sections.

Drawings:1. Elementary Diagram2. Logic Diagrams

References:1. SOFTWARE section of this manual2. Default Relay Settings


4-4

4-4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDINGAll equipment used in testing the DGP relay shouldbe connected to a common grounding point, to pro-vide noise immunity. This includes the voltage andcurrent sources, as well as the DGP system itself.The common for surge protection is terminal BH14.

4-5 REQUIRED SETTINGSMost tests will utilize the Default Settings. If settingchanges are required, they will be listed prior to thetest procedure.

For periodic testing purposes, see the PERIODICTESTS Section. It provides details on performingthe relay test with user-specific settings.

4-6 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS1. To remove power from the relay, remove at leastone of the connection plugs (see Figure 4-1 in theMODULES section). For models without the con-nection plugs, turn both DC Control switches to theOFF position.

2. The DGP system is tested in the "test mode" ofoperation. The test mode selects and isolates vari-ous test functions and measuring units, and routestheir status to the output Test Pickup and Test Trip(DOR12 and DOR13) contacts. When the particu-lar function under test has picked up, DOR12 (AF6-AG6) will operate. When the particular functionunder test has tripped, DOR13 (AF5-AG5) will op-erate.

For the remainder of this test, DOR12 will be re-ferred to as "test pickup" and DOR13 as "test trip".

CAUTIONThe Digital Output contacts will chatter when theunit under test is near its threshold. DO NOT let itcontinue. Remove the test signal. A single contactclosure is enough to determine that the unit pickedup.

NOTE: SELECTED TRIP AND ALARMCONTACTS WILL ALSO OPERATE IN THE TESTMODE.

3. The trip-time settings listed in these tests do notinclude the 4-5 ms. for the output relay to operate.For very short trip times, this may become signifi-cant

4. During the test, one or more of the electroniccurrent sources may not be used. If the source is notused, it must be set to zero (0) in addition to beingdisabled. Also, the currents should always be set ator near zero (0) whenever a current source is pow-ered on or off.

5. The phase angles of the test sources are shownrelative to phase A voltage. A positive (+) phase an-gle refers to the referenced quantity leading phase Avoltage. A negative (-) phase angle refers to the ref-erenced quantity lagging phase A voltage.

6. All test voltages are phase-to-ground measure-ments unless otherwise specified.

7. Typing an entry on the MMI keypad will beshown as ["key"] where "key" is the alpha numericlabel of the key to be pressed.

For tests that require a setting change, the settingnumber will be shown in parentheses next to thesetting, to facilitate direct access to the setting. Thisis performed by pressing the [SET] key, the settingnumber (nnnn), and the [ENT] key. The new set-ting may then be entered.

8. At the end of testing, make sure that all settingsare returned to initial values. Print them out, andverify them, before placing the relay in service. If aprinter is not available, scroll through all settingswith the MMI display and verify each one.

4-7 SETTING CHANGESSetting changes required for a particular test will belisted before the test. A sample setting change isshown below. Refer to the INTERFACE section forfurther details on making setting changes.

Example for changing the set point of the Under-frequency Unit #1 to 62.00 Hz.

1. Apply rated DC and wait for relay initialization tocomplete, as indicated by the green LED on theMMI.

2. Press the [ACT] key. Scroll with the arrow keyuntil "ACT: ENTER PASSWORD" is displayed, thenpress the [ENT] key.

If this is the first time the Settings Level functionsare used, the password has the factory value "1234.".The decimal point, is a character that can only beentered at the factory. This password must bechanged before any Setting functions can be ac-


4-5

cessed. See the INTERFACE section for informa-tion on how to change the password.

3. Enter the current Settings Level password. If thepassword is not known, see the INTERFACE sectionfor information on how it can be viewed.

When the correct password is entered, the message"SELECTED" is displayed.

4. Press the [SET] key.

5. Scroll with the arrow key until "SET: 81-1U" isdisplayed, then press the [ENT] key.

6. Scroll through the 81-1U settings until you get to"SET PNT = #.#".

7. Type "62.00" on the keypad. This inputs will beshown on the MMI display at half intensity. Thisrepresents that a change is made but not yet en-tered.

8. When the correct frequency is entered, press the[ENT] key. The inputs will now be shown on theMMI display at full intensity. This represents thatthe change is entered into the settings buffer, butnot permanently changed in the relay.

9. To finalize the setting change, press the [END]key followed by the [ENT] key.

If the [END] and the [ENT] keys are not pressedafter setting changes, the settings will not be storedinto memory.

10. Restore the SET PNT setting back to its origi-nal value before beginning the test. It will be neces-sary to enter the Settings Level password again.

4-8 ENTERING THE TEST MODEBefore each test, it is necessary to set the relay in thetest mode and select the function to be tested. Thetest mode is set as follows:

1. Apply rated DC and wait for relay initialization tocomplete, as indicated by the green LED on theMMI.

2. Press the [ACT] key. Scroll with the arrow keyuntil "ACT: ENTER PASSWORD" is displayed, thenpress the [ENT] key.

If this is the first time the Control Level functionsare used, the password has the factory value "5678.".The decimal point, ".", is a character that can onlybe entered at the factory. This password must be

changed before any Control functions can be ac-cessed. See the INTERFACE section for informa-tion on how to change the password.

3. Enter the current Control Level password. If thepassword is not known, see the INTERFACE sectionfor information on how it can be viewed.

When the correct password is entered, the message"SELECTED" will be displayed.

4. Press the [ACT] key. Scroll with the arrow keyuntil "ACT: RELAY TEST" is displayed, then pressthe [ENT] key.

5. Scroll through the different test mode functionsor enter the number of the desired test, such as "5"for the 40-1 then press [ENT]. Pressing [ENT]again causes the MMI to display "40-1 ON", andthe MMI LED will turn red, indicating that the relayis in the test mode. When the relay picks up or tripsfor the selected function it will close the DOR12 orDOR13 contacts, respectively.

4-9 EXITING THE TEST MODEWhile in the "TEST MODE", press the [ACT] key.Scroll with the arrow key until "ACT: RELAY TEST"is displayed, then press the [ENT] key. Scroll untilthe display shows "END TEST MODE", or press "1"then [ENT]. Then press the [ENT] key. The MMILED should return to green, indicating that normaloperation has resumed.

4-10 USING DGP-LINK(Optional)

To test the relay without using the DGP Keypad,communication with the relay is accomplished via aPC with the program DGP-LINK. DGP-LINK is re-quired to establish communications, change thepassword, change settings for the tests, and place theunit into test mode.

The following section is intended to give a step bystep procedure to test the relay, from setting upcommunications to the application of the voltagesand current inputs. It will be necessary to be famil-iar with the DGP-LINK software. Refer to theSOFTWARE section of this manual for informationon how to use DGP-LINK.


4-6

Hardware Setup

The hardware, specifically the cable to connect yourPC to the relay, depends on the connection the PCrequires and that of the DGP system. The DGP portPL-1 accepts a 25 pin male D-connector. PortCOMM accepts a 9 pin male D-connector. The PCused may require a 9 or a 25 pin connector. Nullmodem cables are shown in the INTERFACE sec-tion for connecting to the DGP system with a 9-pin-to-25-pin and a 25-pin-to-25-pin setup.

PC Software Setup

The Software setup consists of loading the softwareon to the PC, starting the program, and configuringthe program to the PORT and BAUD RATE of thePC and DGP system.

Load & Start DGP-LINK

Use the INSTALLATION guide in the SOFTWAREsection of this manual for directions to load DGP-LINK onto your PC.

Change directories to the location of the DGP-LINKprogram.

Start the program by typing "DGP-LINK" at the DOSprompt.

Set the Local (PC) Configuration

When you start DGP-LINK the MAIN MENU is dis-played.

Select the Setup heading. Refer to the SOFTWAREsection for information on how to select items usingthe keyboard or a mouse.

The SETUP menu will now be displayed.

Select Communication port number.

The default communications port will be displayed.

Type in the port number that matches the PC portconnected to the DGP system.

If port 3 or 4 is selected, the IRQ number must alsobe selected.

Select "OK" when the port is configured.

Set Up a Test Unit Description

The next step is to create a new "Unit Description"that matches the DGP system's baud rate, phone

number, and switch code. The DGP system is ac-cessed locally during testing, therefore the PHONENUMBER and the SWITCH CODE will not be set.The BAUD RATE will be set to the factory setting of2400 with one stop bit and no parity.

Select the Add relay to list heading from the Setupmenu.

When prompted for the UNIT DESCRIPTION, type"TEST" and select "OK".

A new unit description called "TEST" is created andmust now have parameters set for it. The RELAYPARAMETERS menu appears with spaces forPHONE NUMBER, SWITCH CODE, BAUD RATE,STOP BITS, and PARITY.

At the PHONE NUMBER prompt, press [TAB].(This is the default used when there is no phone.)

At the SWITCH CODE prompt, press [TAB]. (Thisis the default value for no switch.)

At the BAUD RATE prompt, select "2400" and press[TAB].

At the STOP BITS prompt, select "1" and press[TAB].

At the PARITY prompt, select "None" and press[TAB].

The Unit Description for "TEST" is complete.

Enter "OK" to return to the Setup menu.

Relay Setup

Before shipment, the relay is set with factory defaultsettings. These include the UnitID, the Baud Rate,and the Factory Passwords. The default communi-cations parameters are:

Setting Factory DefaultUNIT ID 0VIEW

PASSWORDVIEW!

CONTROLPASSWORD

CTRL!

SETTINGSPASSWORD

SETT!

BAUD RATE 2400


4-7

Logging Into the Relay

Select Login from the Relay functions menu.

Select the relay login data for "TEST" just created.

DGP-LINK will prompt for a password. If this is thefirst login to the relay, the passwords are those listedin the table above, and must be changed before anyof the relay functions except CHANGE PASSWORDand LOGOUT will operate. See the SOFTWAREsection of this manual for information on how tochange a password.

Type in the current password and press [TAB].

If the password is not known, refer to theINTERFACE section of this manual for informationon how to display the current password.

DGP-LINK will prompt for the unit ID.

Type in "0" and press [TAB]. Select "OK".

DGP-LINK will respond with a "SUCCESSFULLOGIN" message.

If this was an initial login with the above factory de-fault password, the user must change the passwordthen logout at this point, and login again with thecurrent password in order to get a complete displayof all the DGP menus.

Select Logout from the Relay functions menu andselect "OK".

Setting Changes

Setting changes required for a particular test will belisted before the test. A setting can be changed intwo ways, by category or individually, by selectingeither view/change Category of settings orview/change Individual settings from the DGP-LINK Relay functions Settings menu. A procedurefor and example of how to change settings is pro-vided in the SOFTWARE section of this manual.

It is important to remember to select End settingschanges from the Settings menu after all settingschanges for a particular test are completed. Select-ing “End settings changes” tells the relay to executethe new settings immediately.

Entering the Test Mode

Before most tests it is necessary to set the relay in thetest mode according to the function to be tested.The test mode is set as follows:

Select Change access level from the Relay functionsmenu.

Enter the Control Access password

When the password is accepted, "CONTROLACCESS" will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Select Relay test from the DGP-LINK Actions menu.

The Test Mode list box appears.

Select the test you wish to enter from the menu andthen select "OK".

The MMI LED will change from green to red whenthe DGP system is in the test mode.

Exiting the Test Mode

The test mode is ended, and the relay protectionturned on, by selecting End test mode from the TestMode list box and then selecting "OK". The MMILED changes from red to green and "Relay Not inTest Mode" will appear at the bottom of the screen,indicating that normal operation has resumed.

4-11 INITIAL TEST SETUPBefore beginning the test, the relay settings shouldbe recorded for reference and verification. The fac-tory settings are listed in the CALCULATION OFSETTINGS section. Scroll through each setting andmake sure they all match the default settings listed.

If testing with DGP-LINK, the relay settings shouldbe uploaded from the DGP system and printed forreference and verification. Verify that each DGPsetting matches the default setting listed. If noprinter is available, use the view/change Category ofsettings command for verification.

Once uploaded, the current DGP settings can besaved to a disk file so that they can be reloaded backinto the DGP system when testing is completed. Usethe Save DGP settings to file command in the DGP-LINK Relay functions Settings menu. DGP-LINKwill prompt you for a name for the file, after whichyou should enter a valid MS-DOS filename. Moreinformation on how to use this command can befound in the SOFTWARE section of this manual.


4-8

4-12 GENERAL RELAY TESTSNOTE:

All Settings or Control changes must have their re-spective passwords entered before any changes canbe made. After all of the settings changes have beenentered, the key-sequence, "END" followed by"ENT", must be entered so that the relay can acceptand operate with the new settings.

T1-MMI Status and Display Testing

The Relay's Status is reported through the MMI, thenon-critical alarm contact, and the critical alarmcontact. If a system error caused relaying functionsto cease, the LED on the MMI would turn red, a"FAIL" message would be displayed on the MMI,and the critical alarm relay would de-energize. Afailure that did not interrupt relaying would be in-dicated by energizing the non-critical alarm relay,and by a "WARN" message on the MMI display.

Status Check

This test will demonstrate the use of the MMI tocheck relay status. See the SERVICING section forfurther information.

1. The AC inputs are not required for this test, onlythe DC power supply voltage. Apply rated DCpower and wait for initialization to complete, asindicated by the green LED.

2. Enter the "Setting Level" password. Press the[SET] key followed by "103" to change the settingfor the trip circuit monitor. For the setting SELTVM enter "0000".

NOTE: Press [END] and [ENT] keys after eachsetting change.

3. Press the [INF] key. Then scroll with the arrowkeys until the heading "INF: STATUS" is dis-played.

4. Press the [ENT] key.

The display should be "STATUS OK". "OK" repre-sents that the relay is operational and there are noerrors.

Warning Status

1. Enter the "Setting Level" password. Press the[SET] key followed by "103" to change the setting

for the trip circuit monitor. For the setting SELTVM enter "1111". When this is done, the relayexpects wetting voltage across the trip contacts.Press the [END] and then [ENT] keys.

2. Press the [INF] key. Then scroll with the arrowkeys until the heading "INF: STATUS" is dis-played.

3. Press the [ENT] key.The display should be "STATUS: WARN".

4. Scroll with the arrow keys until the heading "94GTRP CIR OPN" is displayed. Continue scrollingthrough the remaining trip circuit outputs(94G1, 94G2, 94G3). This verifies that the relaydetected the absence of wetting voltage across thetrip contacts.

5. Enter the "Setting Level" password. Press the[SET] key followed by "103" to change the settingfor the trip circuit monitor. For the setting SELTVM enter "0000". Press the [END] and then[ENT] keys.

Display Test

The MMI test is built into the software. It allows theuser to test the keypad, the printer, and the display.If no printer is to be used with your relay, then skipthe printer port testing.

1. Apply rated DC power and wait for initializationto complete, as indicated by the green LED.

2. Press the [ACT] key. Then scroll with the arrowkeys until the heading "ACT: MMI TEST" is dis-played.

3. Press the [ENT] key.The display should be " NEXT?".

4. Press the [1/Y] followed by the [ENT] key.The display will change to "LED TST? ".

5. Press the [1/Y] followed by the [ENT] key.If the green LED is on, it will be changed to red.If the red LED is on, then it will be changed togreen. The Target LEDs will then flash on/off 4times. Then each Target LED will be lit indi-vidually. When the test is over, the Target LEDswill be returned to their original state.

6. Next, the display will prompt you for the key-board test with "KEYBRD TST?".

7. Press the [1/Y] key followed by the [ENT] key.


4-9

8. At this point the MMI is in the keyboard test.Press every key on the keypad, except for the[CLR] key. As you press each key, verify that thedisplay indicates the key that was pressed.

9. When all the keys have been checked, press the[CLR] key.

10. The display will prompt “PRINTER TST?”. ifyou do not have a printer or the printer port isnot active as per the model of DGP you have,then press the [3/N] followed by the [ENT] key.Otherwise, press the [1/Y] followed by the[ENT] key.

T2 - Digital Output Tests

This test is used to check all outputs of the relay. Itis a convenient way to determine proper systemconnections and verify the operation of all relaycontacts, without having to apply currents and volt-ages to simulate faults.

Note: If DGP-LINK is used to perform this test, noneof the outputs will operate unless Jumper J1 on theMMI module is removed. Refer to Figure 4-3?? inthe MODULES section.

1. Connect the relay as shown in Figure 4-1.

2. Enter the "Control Level" password.

3. Press the [ACT] key and then select "DIG OUTTEST". Press the [ENT] key.

4. Select the output to test by using the arrow keys toscroll to the desired output, such as 94G, andpress the [ENT] key.

Before the contact is allowed to close you will beprompted to turn protection off during the test.The prompt is: "DISABLE PROT?". Press the[1/Y] key followed by the [ENT] key to turn pro-tection off. Protection will remain off until thetest mode is ended.

Once the protection choice is chosen, the "relayoutput" selected will close.

Verify that the output under test has closed, usingan ohm meter or other suitable device.

5. After the output is tested, scroll to the next out-put to test, then press the [ENT] key. This out-put will close and the previously selected outputwill open. Continue in this fashion until all out-puts are tested.

6. End the test mode by scrolling to the "END TESTMODE" selection, then press the [ENT] key. Al-ternatively, [END] followed by the [ENT] key canbe pressed to end the test and re-enable protec-tion.

T3 - Digital Input Tests

This test is used to check all digital inputs of the re-lay. It is a convenient way to determine proper sys-tem connections and verify the operation of all dualoptically isolated digital inputs. All digital inputsshould be between 35 and 300 VDC.

Protection can be enabled or disabled, as deemednecessary by the user.


2. Apply DC across DI1 (BG8-BG7). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that GEN = OFF-LINE.

3. Remove DC from DI1 (BG8-BG7). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that GEN = ON-LINE.

4. Apply DC across DI2 (BG6-BG5). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that INLET VLV=CLOSED.

5. Remove DC from DI2 (BG6-BG5). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that INLET VLV=OPEN.

6. Apply DC across DI3 (BG4-BG3). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that DIG IN 3 = CLOSE.

7. Remove DC from DI3 (BG4-BG3). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that DIG IN 3 = OPEN.

8. Apply DC across DI4 (BG2-BG1). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that DIG IN 4 = CLOSE.

9. Remove DC from DI4 (BG2-BG1). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that DIG IN 4 = OPEN.

10. Apply DC across DI5 (BE4-BE3). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that OSC TRIG = CLOSE. NOTE:This input is not active on some models of DGP.

11. Remove DC from DI5 (BE4-BE3). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-


4-10

mand, verify that OSC TRIG = OPEN. NOTE:This input is not active on some models of DGP.

12. Apply DC across DI6 (BE2-BE1). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that DIG IN 6 (EXT VTFF) =CLOSE.

13. Remove DC from DI6 (BE2-BE1). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that DIG IN 6 (EXT VTFF) =OPEN.

T4 - AC System Input Test

This test uses the INFORMATION - VALUES func-tion of the MMI to determine that the voltages andcurrents are applied to the proper connections onthe terminal strip. The INFORMATION - VALUESfunction can be used at any time during the test toverify that the relay has the correct voltages and cur-rents applied.


2. Using a 60 Hz source set the current inputs to: IA= 0.5(0.1) A rms 0°, IB = 2.0(0.4) A rms -120°,and IC = 15.0(3.0) A rms -240° and set the volt-age inputs to: VA = 20V rms 0°, VB = 70V rms -120°, and VC = 120V rms -240°.

3. Press the [INF] key on the MMI. Scroll with ar-row keys to the "INF: VALUES" heading, thenpress the [ENT] key. The present values are nowselected.

4. With the arrow keys, scroll through the values of:

IAS, ANGLE IASIBS, ANGLE IBSICS, ANGLE ICSIAR, ANGLE IARIBR, ANGLE IBRICR, ANGLE ICRVAN, ANGLE VANVBN, ANGLE VBNVCN, ANGLE VCNGEN FREQ

Check that all frequency measurements arewithin 0.01 Hz and all voltage and current meas-urements are within 3% of their set amplitudeand 1 degree of their set phase.

Note: Other quantities are listed between thevalues of ANGLE VCN and GEN FREQ. Thesewill be tested in another section.

If a printer is available, press the [PRT] key whilein the VALUES category and all present valueswill be printed. Alternately, whenever the MMIdisplay is blank, pressing the [CLR] key willautomatically scroll through all of the presentvalues.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 using the following fre-quencies for your source: 30.5 and 79.5.

4-13 PROTECTION FUNCTIONSNOTE:All Settings or Control changes must have their re-spective passwords entered before any changes canbe made. After all of the settings changes have beenentered, the key sequence, "END" followed by"ENT", must be entered so that the relay can acceptand operate with the new settings.

Before starting the Protection Functions test, inputthe following settings into the Configuration cate-gory.

Settings:

CONFIG(102) SYSFREQ = 60(103) SEL TVM = 0000(104) SEL TCM = 0000(105) SELPRIM =SECNDRY (1)(106) CT RATIO = 1(107) VT RATIO =1.0(109) PHASE =A-B-C(114) NOM VOLT = 120.0(115) RATEDCUR = 5.00(1.00)

Protection Function testing can be done by twomethods. In protection mode, all outputs are di-rected to the selected Trip/Alarm output contacts.In test mode, all outputs are directed to the test-output contacts (DOR12-test pickup, DOR13-testtrip), along with the selected Trip/Alarm contacts.Test pickup has a normally open (AF6-AG6) and anormally closed (AF6-AE6) contact. Test trip alsohas a normally open (AF5-AG5) and a normallyclosed (AF5-AE5) contact.

To enter test mode, first input the Control Levelpassword. Press the [ACT] key, then scroll until theheading "ACT:RELAY TEST" is displayed. Press the[ENT] key. Scroll through the different functionsuntil you reach the function to be tested. Press the[ENT] key. The status light will turn red and the


4-11

MMI will display "ON" next to the function to betested.

NOTES1. Although the status light is red, the protection

functions are still ON while the relay is in testmode.

2. Where appropriate, current levels are definedwith two numbers as xx(yy); xx is the value to beused for relays rated at 5 amperes and (yy) is thevalue to be used for 1 ampere relays.

T5- Generator Differential Test, 87G

Settings:87G(203) K1 = 5(204) PICKUP = 0.3(0.06)


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 87G function;"87G ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the current of IAR to 5(1)A rms and IAS to5(1)A rms in phase. The test pickup and test tripcontacts should not operate. Increase IAS to7(1.3)A rms and test pickup and test trip shouldoperate. Set IAS to 5(1)A rms and test pickupand test trip should not operate. Decrease IAS to3(0.75)A rms and test pickup and test trip shouldoperate.

4. Repeat the above test for phases B (IBR,IBS) andC (ICR,ICS).

T6 - Current Unbalance Alarm, 46A

Settings:46A(302) PICKUP = 0.05(0.01)(303) TL14 = 1


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 46A function;"46A ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the current inputs to: IAS = 0.4(0.08)A rms0°, IBS = 0.4(0.08)A rms -120°, and ICS =0.4(0.08)A rms -240°. Test pickup and test tripshould not operate. Change the current inputsto: IAS = 0.25(0.05)A rms 0° , IBS = 0.0A rms -120°, and ICS = 0.0A rms -240° and test pickupshould operate immediately and test trip shouldoperate in 1.00 to 1.03 seconds.

T7 - Current Unbalance Trip, 46T

Settings:46T(403) PICKUP = 2.0(0.4)(404) K2 = 1.0


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 46T function;"46T ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the current inputs to: IAS = 2.0(0.4)A rms 0°,IBS = 2.0(0.4)A rms -120°, and ICS = 2.0(0.4)Arms -240°. Test pickup and test trip contactsshould not operate. Change the current inputsto: IAS = 6.3(1.26)A rms 0°, IBS = 0.0A rms -120°,and ICS = 0.0A rms -240°. Test pickup shouldoperate immediately and test trip should operatein 5.5 to 5.7 seconds.

NOTE:If this test is repeated, the operate time of the tripcontact will change according to how soon the test isrepeated. The trip time can be calculated accordingto the following equation:

New Trip Time = (X/230)*(Original Trip Time)

where X = the time between successive tests andOriginal Trip Time = the 5.5 to 5.7 seconds it origi-nally took to trip the relay. If the time between suc-cessive trips is greater than 230 seconds, the relaywill trip in the original trip time.

T8- Loss of Field Protection Zone 1, 40-1

Settings:40(501) SELV2SUP = DISABLE (0)40-1(603) CENTER = 11(55)(604) RADIUS = 8.5(42.5)(605) TL12 = 0.06


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 40-1 function;"40-1 ON" will be displayed on the MMI. Usingthe MMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that DIG IN 6 (EXT VTFF) =OPEN.

3. Using a 60 Hz source set the voltage inputs to:VA = 35V rms 0°, VB = 35V rms -120°, and VC =


4-12

35V rms -240°. Set the current inputs accordingto Table 4-1.

TABLE 4-1

Phase A Phase B Phase CTest Mag. Phase Mag. Phase Mag. PhaseA. 14.5(2.9) 90 14.5

(2.9)-30 14.5

(2.9)-150

B. 12.5(2.5) 90 12.5(2.5)

-30 12.5(2.5)

-150

C. 1.7(0.34) 90 1.7(0.34)

-30 1.7(0.34)

-150

D. 1.9(0.38) 90 1.9(0.38)

-30 1.9(0.38)

-150

4. The following results should be obtained for theinputs of Table 4-1:

TEST RESULTSA & C Test pickup and test trip do not operate.B & D Test pickup operates immediately and test

trip operates in 65 to 85 ms.

5. Apply DC voltage across DI6 (BE2-BE1). Usingthe MMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that DIG IN 6 (EXT VTFF) =CLOSE.

6. Repeat test D from Table 4-1 and verify that thetest pickup and test trip do not operate.

7. Remove DC from DI6 (BE2-BE1). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUES com-mand, verify that DIG IN 6 (EXT VTFF) = OPEN.

8. Change the following setting:(501) SELV2SUP = ENABLE (1)

9. Set VA = 50V rms 0°, IA = 2.7(0.54)A rms 90°,and all other AC sources to 0. Verify that the testpickup and test trip do not operate.

T9- Loss of Field Protection Zone 2, 40-2

Settings:40-2(703) CENTER = 11 (55)(704) RADIUS = 8.5 (42.5)(705) TL13 = 2


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 40-2 function;"40-2 ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Using a 60 Hz source set the voltage inputs to:VA = 35V rms 0°, VB = 35V rms -120°, and VC =

35V rms -240°. Set the current inputs accordingto Table 4-1.


TEST RESULTSA & C Test pickup and test trip do not operate.B & D Test pickup operates immediately and test

trip operates in 2.0 to 2.1 seconds.

T10 - Anti-Motoring and SequentialTrip Supervision, 32-1

Settings:32-1(803) SQ TR EN = YES (1/Y)(804) REV PWR = 1.5(0.3)(805) TL1 = 5

DIG INP(2501) SELBKDI1 = NO BLK (0)



3. Using a 60 Hz source set the voltage inputs to:VA = 20V rms 0°, VB = 20V rms -120°, and VC =20V rms -240° and set the current input to IA =0.1(0.02)A rms 180°. Phases B and C shouldhave no current. Verify that test pickup operatesand test trip do not operate.

4. Apply DC across DI2 (BG6-BG5). Using the MMIand the INFORMATION - VALUES command,verify that INLET VLV=CLOSED. Repeat theabove test and verify that the test pickup operatesimmediately and the test trip operates in 5.0 to5.05 seconds.

5. Leaving all of the AC signals applied; remove DCfrom DI2 (BG6-BG5). Using the MMI and theINFORMATION - VALUES command, verify thatINLET VLV=OPEN. Check that the test trip con-tact has dropped out.

6. Change the following setting:(803) SQ TR EN = NO (3/N)

Leaving all of the AC signals applied, notice thatthe test pickup operates immediately and the testtrip operates in 5.0 - 5.1 seconds.


4-13

T11 - Anti-Motoring, 32-2

NOTE:Skip this test if your model of DGP does not havethis function.

Settings:32-2(903) REV PWR = 1.5(0.3)(904) TL2 = 1

DIG INP(2501) SELBKDI1 = NO BLK (0)



3. Using a 60 Hz source set the voltage inputs to:VA = 20V rms 0°, VB = 20V rms -120°, and VC =20V rms -240° and set the current input to IA =0.1(0.02)A rms 180°. Phases B and C shouldhave no current.

Verify that test pickup operates immediately andtest trip operates in 1.00 - 1.05 seconds.

T12- Time Overcurrent with VoltageRestraint, 51V

Settings:51V(1003) PICKUP = 0.5(0.1)(1004) TIME FAC = 1.0


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 51V function;"51V ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Using a 60 Hz source set the voltage inputs to:VA = 70V rms 0°, VB = 70V rms -120°, and VC =70V rms -240°. Set the current inputs accordingto Table 4-2.

TABLE 4-2

Phase A Phase B Phase CTest Mag. Phase Mag. Phase Mag. Phase

A. 0.45(0.09)

0 0.45(0.09)

-120 0.45(0.09)

-240

B. 2.0(0.4) 0 2.0(0.4) -120 2.0(0.4) -240


TEST RESULTS

A. Test pickup and test trip do not operate.B. Test pickup operates immediately and test trip

operates in 1.00 to 1.04 sec.

5. Apply DC voltage across DI6 (BE2-BE1). Usingthe MMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that DIG IN 6 (EXT VTFF) =CLOSE.

6. Repeat test B from Table 4-2. Verify that the testpickup operates but the test trip does not operate.

7. Remove DC from DI6 and all phase currents. Re-apply each phase current separately and verifythat both test contacts operate for each phase, asin step 4B.

T13 - Accidental Energization, AE

Settings:AE(2703) AE ARM = AND (0)

51V(1002) ALARM = 1000 (Enable 51V function)

1. Connect the relay as shown in Figure 4-6. Use thesame AC settings as in T12, step 3, except set thevoltage of each phase at 29V rms.

2. Set up relay in test mode for the AE function;"AE ON" will be displayed.

3. Apply DC voltage across DI1 (BG8-BG7). Usingthe MMI and the INFORMATION VALUEScommand, verify that GEN=OFF LINE.

4. Verify that test pickup and test trip operate in 5 -5.05 seconds.

5. Remove DC from DI1 (BG8-BG7). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION VALUES com-mand, verify that GEN= ON LINE. Notice thatthe test trip and test pickup drop out in 0.25 -0.30 seconds.

6. Change the voltage of all 3 phases to 35V rms andchange the following setting:

(2703) AE - ARM = OR (1)

Reapply DC voltage across DI1 input (BG8-BG7).

8. Verify that test pickup and test trip operate in 5 -5.05 seconds.


4-14

T14 - Stator Ground Zone 1, 64G1

Settings:64G1(1103) PICKUP = 4.0(1104) TL4 = 0.1


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 64G1 function;"64G1 ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set all current inputs to 0. Set the voltage inputsaccording to Table 4-3.

TABLE 4-3

Phase A Phase B Phase CTest Mag. Phase Mag. Phase Mag. PhaseA. 70 0 70 -120 3.8 -240B. 70 0 70 -120 4.2 -240


TESTRESULTA. Test pickup and test trip do not operate.B. Test pickup operates immediately and test trip

operates in 110 to 130 ms.



Settings:64G2(1203) TL5 = 0.1DIG INP(2501) SELBKDI1 = NO BLK (0)

1. Connect the relay as shown in figure 4-7.


3. Set the following inputs using 60Hz for phase Aand 180Hz for phases B and C.

TABLE 4-4

Phase A (60Hz) Phase B (180Hz) Phase C (180Hz)Test Mag. Phase Mag. Phase Mag. PhaseA. 100 0 10 0 1 0B. 100 0 10 0 0.5 0


TEST RESULT

A. Test pickup and test trip do not operate.B. Test pickup operates immediately and test trip

operates in 110 to 130 ms.

5. Change the following settings:(2501) SELBKDI1 = BLK #2 (2)

6. Apply DC voltage across DI1 (BG8-BG7). Repeattest B and verify that the test contacts do not op-erate. Remove DC from DI1 (BG8-BG7) and ver-ify that test pickup operates immediately and testtrip operates in 110 to 130 ms.

T16 - Volt/Hertz OverexcitationAlarm, 24A

Settings:24A(1302) PICKUP = 1.5(1303) TL6 = 1



3. Set all current inputs to 0. Set the voltage inputsaccording to Table 4-5.

TABLE 4-5

Phase A Phase B Phase C Freq.Test Mag. Phase Mag. Phase Mag. Phase HzA. 69 0 69 -120 69 -240 60B. 114 0 69 -120 69 -240 60C. 69 0 114 -120 69 -240 60D. 69 0 69 -120 114 -240 60E. 69 0 69 -120 69 -240 39


TEST RESULTA. Test pickup and test trip do not operate.B-D. Test pickup operates immediately and test

trip operates in 1.00 - 1.05 seconds.E. Test pickup operates immediately and test

trip operates in 1.20 - 1.40 seconds.

T17 - Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Trip,24T

Settings:24T(1404) INV CURV = 1


4-15

(1405) INV PU = 1.5(1406) TIME FAC = 99.99(1407) INST PU = 1.5(1408) TL7 = 1(1409) RESET = 1



3. Set all current inputs to 0. Using a 60 Hz source,set the voltage inputs according to Table 4-6.

TABLE 4-6

Phase A Phase B Phase CTest Mag. Phase Mag. Phase Mag. PhaseA. 114 0 69 -120 69 -240B. 69 0 114 -120 69 -240C. 69 0 69 -120 114 -240

4. Verify that for all tests in Table 4-6, test pickupoperates immediately and test trip operates in 1.0to 1.05 seconds.

5. Change the following setting:

24T (1406) TIME FAC = 1 (1408) TL7 = 9.9

6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 except test trip should nowoerpates in 5.0 to 5.5 seconds.

NOTE:If this test is repeated, the operate time of the tripcontact will change according to how soon thetest is repeated. The trip time can be calculatedaccording to the following equation:

New Trip Time = (X/Reset)*(Original TripTime)

where X = the time between successive tests,Original Trip Time = the 5.0 to 5.5 seconds itoriginally took to trip the relay, and Reset = Set-ting (1409). If the time between successive tripsis greater than the Reset time, the relay will tripin the original trip time.

T18 - Positive Sequence Overvoltage,59

Settings:59(1503) PICKUP = 120(1504) TIME FAC = 1

(1505) CURVE # =1 (Not available in DGP*AA)(1506) INST PU = 240 (DGP****CA only)


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 59 function; "59ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set all current inputs to 0. Using a 60 Hz sourceset the voltage inputs according to Table 4-7.

TABLE 4-7

Phase A Phase B Phase CTest Mag. Phase Mag. Phase Mag. PhaseA. 65 0 65 -120 65 -240B. 100 0 100 -120 100 -240C. 200 0 200 -120 200 -240


TEST RESULT

A. Test pickup and test trip do not operate.

B. Test pickup operates immediately and test tripoperates in 2.18 to 2.32 seconds.

C. Test pickup operates immediately and test tripoperates in 540 to 570 ms (See note below).

NOTE:

For the DGP****CA model, the trip time shouldbe approximately 30 ms. since the instantaneousunit should operate before the inverse curve.

T19- Underfrequency Unit#1, 81-1U

Settings:81(1601) CUTOFF = 90

81-1U(1703) SET PNT =60(1704) TL8 = 2


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 81-1U function;"81-1U ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set all current inputs to 0. Using a 61 Hz source,set the voltage inputs to: VA = 70V rms 0° , VB =70V rms -120° , and VC = 70V rms -240° .

4. Verify that test pickup and test trip do not operate

5. Change the frequency of the voltage inputs to 59Hz.


4-16

6. Verify that test pickup operates immediately andtest trip operates in 2.0 to 2.1 seconds.


Settings:81-2U(1803) SET PNT =60(1804) TL9 = 2



3. Repeat steps 3 thru 6 in test T19.










1. Connect the relay as shown in Figure 4-6.2. Set up relay in test mode for the 81-4U function;

"81-4U ON" will be displayed on the MMI.3. Repeat steps 3 thru 6 in test T19.

T23 - Overfrequency Unit #1, 81-1O

Settings:81-1O(2103) SET PNT =60(2104) TL15 = 2


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 81-1O function;"81-1O ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set all current inputs to 0. Using a 59 Hz sourceset the voltage inputs to: VA = 70V rms 0° , VB =70V rms -120° , and VC = 70V rms -240° .

4. Verify that the test pickup and test trip do notoperate.

5. Change the frequency of the voltage inputs to 61Hz

6. Verify test pickup operates immediately and testtrip operates in 2.0 to 2.1 seconds.













NOTE: Skip this test if your model of DGP does nothave this function.



4-17




T27 - Voltage Transformer Fuse Fail-ure, VTFF

Settings:DIG INP(2501) SELBKDI1 = NO BLK (0)

VTFF(2601) VTFF = ENABLE (1)


2. Set up relay in test mode for the VTFF function;"VTFF ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the voltage inputs to: VA = 70V rms 0° , VB =70V rms -120° , and VC = 70V rms -240° . Set thecurrent inputs to: IAS = 0.5A rms 90° , IBS = 0.5Arms -30° , and ICS = 0.5A rms -150° . Verify thatneither the test pickup nor the test trip operates.

4. Decrease the voltage in all three phases to 49Vrms. Verify that test pickup and test trip operatein 12.4 to 13.0 seconds.

T28 - TOC Ground Overcurrent, 51GN


Settings:51GN(2803) PICKUP = 0.5(0.1)(2804) TIME FAC = 1.0


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 51GN function;"51GN ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the current input to: IAR = 0.45(0.09)A rms.Set the voltage inputs to: VA = 70V rms 0° , VB =70V rms -120° , and VC = 70V rms -240° . Verifythat neither the test pickup nor the test trip oper-ates.

4. Increase the current input to: IAR = 1.5(0.3)Arms. Verify that test pickup operates immedi-ately, and test trip operates in 1.30 to 1.45 sec-onds.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, but use 20(4.0)A rms in step4, and verify that test pickup operates immedi-ately and test trip operates in 184 to 204 ms.

T29 - Undervoltage, 27


Settings:27(2903) PICKUP = 100(2904) TIME FAC = 1.0(2905) CURVE # = 1



3. Set the voltage inputs to: VA = 70V rms 0° , VB =70V rms -120° , and VC = 70V rms -240° . Verifythat neither the test pickup nor the test trip oper-ates.

4. Decrease the voltage inputs to: VA = 30V rms 0° ,VB = 30V rms -120° , and VC = 30V rms -240° .Verify that test pickup operates immediately, andtest trip operates in 1.03 to 1.15 seconds.

T30 - 3rd Harmonic Neutral Under-voltage, 27TN


Settings:27TN(3003) PICKUP = 0.9(3004) TL20 = 2.0(3005) FORPWR-L = 10(3006) FORPWR-H = 20


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 27TN function;"27TN ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the voltage and current (rms) inputs to:

VA = 80V, 0° , 60Hz.VN = 1V, 0° , 180HzIAS = 0.1A, 0° , 60Hz.

Verify that neither the test pickup nor the testtrip operates.


4-18

4. Reduce VN to 0V. Verify that test pickup operatesimmediately, and test trip operates in 2.0 to 2.1seconds.

5. Change IAS to 0.2A, 0°, 60Hz. Verify that testpickup and test trip do not operate.

6. Change IAS to 0.3A, 0°, 60Hz. Verify that testpickup operates immediately, and test trip oper-ates in 2.0 to 2.1 seconds.

4-14 END OF TESTMake sure that the relay is no longer in test mode;select END TEST MODE from the test mode menu.

Print out or scroll through all of the settings. Com-pare them with the initial Settings of the relay, andchange to initial values.

If the initial settings were saved to a disk file beforetesting using DGP-LINK, download the file to therelay.


4-19

BH14 SURGE + CASE GROUND

UNIT UNDER TEST

RATED DCPOWERSUPPLY48, 125, 250 V

RATED DCVOLTAGEAG2 or TP1-15

+

-

AG1 or TP1-1

CONTINUITY TESTER

DIGITALOUTPUTS

(SEE TABLE)

X

Y

DIGITALOUTPUTS

94G

X Y

94G1

94G294G374A74B74C74D

74CR74NC74FF

TEST PICKUPTEST TRIP

BE10

BE9

BE8BE7AF14AF13AF12AF11AF7AF8AF10AF6AF5

BF10

BF9

BF8BF7

AG14AG13AG12AG11AG7AG8AG10AG6AG5

Figure 4-1 Digital Output Test Connections


4-20


UNIT UNDER TEST


RATED DCVOLTAGE

AG2 or TP1-15

+

-

AG1 or TP1-1

BG8

BG7

BG4

BG3

BG6

BG5

BE2

BE1

BE4

BE3

BG2

BG1

DI1

DI6

DI5

DI4

DI3

DI2

Figure 4-2 Digital Input Test Connections


4-21



+

-BH14 SURGE + CASE GND

UNIT UNDER TEST

IN

AG1 or TP1-1

IABH1 or TP1-7

BH2 or TP1-8

IBBH3 or TP1-9

BH4 or TP1-10

BH5 or TP1-11IC

BH6 or TP1-12

BH7 or TP1-13

BH8 or TP1-14

IAS

IBS

ICS

INS

3 PHASE,4 WIRE

CURRENTSOURCEPHASE

SEQ. A,B,C

VA

BH9 or TP1-18

BH10 or TP1-19

VBBH12 or TP1-21

BH11 or TP1-20

VCAH10 or TP2-19

AH9 or TP2-18

3 PHASE,4 WIRE

VOLTAGESOURCEPHASE

SEQ. A,B,C

VA

VN

VB

VC

IAR

IBR

ICR

INR

AH1 or TP2-7

AH2 or TP2-8

AH3 or TP2-9

AH4 or TP2-10

AH5 or TP2-11

AH6 or TP2-12

AH8 or TP2-14

AH7 or TP2-13

+

-

Figure 4-3 AC System Input Test Connections


4-22


UNIT UNDER TEST


RATED DCVOLTAGE

AG2 or TP1-15

+

-

AG1 or TP1-1

CONTINUITY TESTER

TEST PICKUP

AF6

AG6

CONTINUITY TESTER

TEST TRIP

AF5

AG5

SINGLE PHASECURRENT SOURCE

IR

N

PHASEUNDERTEST

TERMINALBLOCK

NUMBER

XTMTERMINALNUMBER

INPUT X1 INPUT X2

TERMINALBLOCK

NUMBER

TERMINALBLOCK

NUMBER

TERMINALBLOCK

NUMBER

XTMTERMINALNUMBER

XTMTERMINALNUMBER

XTMTERMINALNUMBER

A

B

C

AH1 TP2-7

AH3

AH5

TP2-9

TP2-11

AH2

AH4

AH6

BH1

BH3

BH5

BH2

BH4

BH6

TP2-8

TP2-10

TP2-12

TP1-7

TP1-9

TP1-11

TP1-8

TP1-10

TP1-12

X1

X2

AH7 or TP2-13

AH8 or TP2-14

INPUT Y1 INPUT Y2

SY

NC

HR

ON

IZA

TIO

N

I(A,B,C)R

INR

SINGLE PHASECURRENT SOURCE

IS

N

Y1

Y2

BH7 or TP1-13

BH8 or TP1-14

I(A,B,C)S

INS

Figure 4-4 Generator Differential Test Connections


4-23


UNIT UNDER TEST

3 PHASE,4 WIRE

CURRENTSOURCE

PHASESEQ. A,B,C

IA BH1 or TP1-7

BH2 or TP1-8

IBBH3 or TP1-9

BH4 or TP1-10

BH5 or TP1-11IC

IN

BH6 or TP1-12

BH7 or TP1-13

BH8 or TP1-14

IAS

IBS

ICS

INS


RATED DCVOLTAGE

AG2 or TP1-15

+

-

AG1 or TP1-1

START

STOP TEST TRIP

CONTINUITY TESTER TEST PICKUP

AF5

AG5

AF6

AG6

PRECISION TIMER

Figure 4-5 Current Unbalance Test Connections


4-24

BH14SURGE + CASE GROUND

UNIT UNDER TEST


RATED DCVOLTAGE

AG2 or TP1-15

+

-

AG1 or TP1-1

START

STOP TEST TRIP

CONTINUITY TESTER

TEST PICKUP

AF5

AG5

AF6

AG6

PRECISION TIMER

VA

BH9 or TP1-18

BH10 or TP1-19

VBBH12 or TP1-21

BH11 or TP1-20

VCAH10 or TP2-19

AH9 or TP2-18

3 PHASE,4 WIRE

VOLTAGESOURCEPHASE

SEQ. A,B,C

VA

VN

VB

VC

IABH1 or TP1-7

BH2 or TP1-8

IBBH3 or TP1-9

BH4 or TP1-10

BH5 or TP1-11IC

BH6 or TP1-12

BH7 or TP1-13

BH8 or TP1-14

IAS

IBS

ICS

INS

3 PHASE,4 WIRE

CURRENTSOURCEPHASE

SEQ. A,B,C

Figure 4-6 Standard Functional Test Connections


4-25

START

STOP TEST TRIP

CONTINUITY TESTER

TEST PICKUP


RATED DCVOLTAGE

AG1 or TP1-1

AG2 or TP1-15

AF5

AG5

AF6

AG6

+

-


PRECISION TIMER

UNIT UNDER TEST

VA

BH9 or TP1-18

BH10 or TP1-19

VBBH12 or TP1-21

BH11 or TP1-20

VCAH10 or TP2-19

AH9 or TP2-18

3 PHASE,4 WIRE

VOLTAGESOURCEPHASE

SEQ. A,B,C

VA

VN

VB

VC

AH11 or TP2-20

AH12 or TP2-21 VN

Figure 4-7 Stator Ground Test Connections


4-26

UNIT UNDER TEST



+

-

AG1 or TP1-1 +

-

BH14 SURGE + CASE GND

VNAH12 or TP2-21

AH11 or TP2-20VOLTAGESOURCE 2

BH1 or TP1-7

BH2 or TP1-8IAS

INSBH7 or TP1-13

BH8 or TP1-14

CURRENTSOURCE 1

VABH10 or TP1-19

BH9 or TP1-18VOLTAGESOURCE 1

TIMER

TESTTRIPAG5

AF5

STOP

STARTV => 0

TESTPICKUPAG6

AF6CONTINUITY

TESTER

Figure 4-8 Stator Ground Test for 27TN Function


5-1

Chapter 5 - PERIODIC TESTS

CHAPTER 5 - PERIODIC TESTS......................................................................................................................................... 5-1

CAUTION .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2

5-1 PERIODIC TESTING OF THE DGP SYSTEM.............................................................................................................. 5-2General Tests...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2Protection Functions........................................................................................................................................................... 5-2

5-2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.......................................................................................................................................... 5-2

5-3 RELAY TESTS................................................................................................................................................................ 5-2T1 - Relay Status & MMI..................................................................................................................................................... 5-2

Status Check....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2Display Test........................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-2

T2 - Digital Output Test ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-3T3 - Digital Input Test ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-3T4 - AC System Input Test ................................................................................................................................................... 5-4

5-4 MEASURING UNIT TESTS............................................................................................................................................. 5-4T5 - Generator Differential Test, 87G.................................................................................................................................. 5-5T6 - Current Unbalance Alarm, 46A.................................................................................................................................... 5-5T7 - Current Unbalance Trip, 46T....................................................................................................................................... 5-5T8 - Loss of Excitation, 40-1................................................................................................................................................ 5-6T9 - Anti-Motoring with Accidental Energization and Sequential Trip Supervision, 32-1..................................................... 5-6T10 - Time Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint, 51V ........................................................................................................... 5-7T11 - Stator Ground Zone 1, 64G1 ...................................................................................................................................... 5-7T12 - Stator Ground Zone 2, 64G2 ...................................................................................................................................... 5-7T13 - Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Alarm, 24A........................................................................................................................ 5-8T14 - Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Trip, 24T ........................................................................................................................... 5-8T15 - Positive Sequence Overvoltage, 59............................................................................................................................. 5-9T16 - Underfrequency Unit #1, 81-1U ................................................................................................................................. 5-9T17 - Overfrequency Unit #1, 81-1O ................................................................................................................................... 5-9T18- Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure, VTFF..................................................................................................................5-10T19 - TOC Ground Overcurrent, 51GN............................................................................................................................. 5-10T20- Positive Sequence Undervoltage, 27..........................................................................................................................5-10

5-9 END OF TEST...............................................................................................................................................................5-11

GEK-100666 Chapter 5 - Periodic Tests

5-2

CAUTIONPower Down the relay by removing the test plugsbefore removing or inserting modules. Failure todo so can permanently damage the relay.

5-1 PERIODIC TESTING OF THEDGP SYSTEM

The formulas below will permit the calculation ofpickup currents and voltages for testing the DGPsystem with settings specific to a particularapplication. The test circuits and procedures arethe same as used and illustrated in theACCEPTANCE TESTS section of this book.

It is up to the user to determine the extent of thetesting to be performed. The tests shown are guidesfor performing the test; they are not strictly requiredto be done at every periodic test of the relay. Thedesired test procedures can be incorporated into theuser's standard test procedures.

However, it is suggested that the relay's built-in "SelfTests" be incorporated into the user's testprocedures. They will give the operational status ofthe unit.

It is assumed that the user is familiar with testingthe DGP system. If not, refer to the ACCEPTANCETEST section for details.

General Tests

T1 MMI Status and Display Tests (Self Tests)T2 Digital Output TestT3 Digital Input TestT4 AC System Input Test

Protection Functions

T5 Generator Differential, 87GT6 Current Unbalance Alarm, 46AT7 Current Unbalance Trip, 46TT8 Loss of Excitation, 40-1T9 Anti-Motoring with Accidental Energization

and Sequential Trip Supervision, 32-1T10 Time Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint, 51VT11 Stator Ground Zone1, 64G1T12 Stator Ground Zone2, 64G2*T13 Overexcitation (Volts/Hz) Alarm, 24AT14 Overexcitation (Volts/Hz) Trip, 24TT15 Overvoltage, 59T16 Underfrequency, 81-1U

T17 Overfrequency, 81-1OT18 Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure, VTFFT19 TOC Ground Overcurrent, 51GN*T20 Undervoltage, 27*

* Functions available on some models only.

5-2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS1. Refer to sections 4-2 to 4-9 of the ACCEPTANCE

TEST for general information on preparing totest the DGP.

2. Before beginning the test, the relay settingsshould be printed for reference and verification.If no printer is available, scroll through eachsetting and make sure they match the requiredsettings of the relay.

5-3 RELAY TESTST1 - Relay Status & MMI

The Relay's Status is reported through the MMI, thenon-critical alarm contact, and the critical alarmcontact. If a system error caused relaying functionsto cease, the LED on the MMI would turn red, a"FAIL" message would be displayed on the MMI,and the critical alarm relay would de-energize. Afailure that did not interrupt relaying would beindicated by energizing the non-critical alarm relay,and by a "WARN" message on the MMI display.

If a STATUS error is detected, see the SERVICINGsection for further information.

Status Check


2. Press the [INF] key. Then scroll with the arrowkeys until the heading "INF: STATUS" isdisplayed.

3. Press the [ENT] key.The display should show "STATUS OK".

Display Test

The MMI test is built into the software. It allows theuser to test the keypad, the printer, and the display.If no printer is to be used with your relay, then skipthe printer port testing.


5-3


2. Press the [ACT] key. Then scroll with the arrowkeys until the heading "ACT: MMI TEST" isdisplayed.

3. Press the [ENT] key.The display should show " NEXT?".

4. Press the [1/Y] followed by the [ENT] key.The display will change to "LED TST? ".

5. Press the [1/Y] followed by the [ENT] key.

If the green LED is on, it will be extinguished andthe red LED will be lit. If the red LED is lit, it willbe extinguished and the green LED will be lit.The Target LED's will then flash on/off 4 times.Then each Target LED will be lit individually.When the test is over the Target LED's will bereturned to their original state.

6. Next, the display will prompt you for thekeyboard test with "KEYBRD TST?".

7. Press the [1/Y] key followed by the [ENT] key.

8. At this point the MMI is in the keyboard test.Press every key on the keypad, except for the[CLR] key. As you press each key, verify that thedisplay indicates the key that was pressed.

9. When all the keys have been checked, press the[CLR] key.

10. The display prompt will be "PRINTER TST?". Ifyou do not have a printer, the press the [3/N]followed by the [ENT] key. If you have a printer,press the [1/Y] followed by the [ENT] key.

The printout will be 40 characters, which includethe alphabet, the numbers 0 through 9, and the:=/. characters. Forty lines will be printed.

T2 - Digital Output Test

This test is used to check all outputs of the relay. Itis a convenient way to determine proper systemconnections and verify the operation of all relaycontacts, without having to apply currents andvoltages to simulate faults.

NOTE:If DGP-LINK is used to perform this test,none of the outputs will operate unless jumper J1 onthe MMI module is removed. Refer to Figure 4-3 inthe MODULES section.

1. Connect the relay as shown in Figure 4-1 in theACCEPTANCE TESTS section.

2. Enter the "Control Level" password.

3. Press the [ACT] key and then select "DIG OUTTEST". Press the [ENT] key.

4. Select the output to test. Use the arrow keys toscroll to the desired output, such as 94G, andpress the [ENT] key.

Before the contact is allowed to close, you will beprompted to turn protection off during the test.The prompt is: "DISABLE PROT?". Press the[1/Y] key followed by the [ENT] key to turnprotection off. Protection will remain off untilthe test mode is ended.

Verify that the output under test has closed, usingan ohm meter or other suitable device.

5. After the output is tested, scroll to the nextoutput to test, then press the [ENT] key. Thisoutput will close and the previously selectedoutput will open. Continue in this fashion untilall outputs are tested.

6. End the test mode by scrolling to the "END TESTMODE" selection, then press the [ENT] key.Alternatively, [END] followed by the [ENT] canbe pressed to end the test and re-enableprotection.

T3 - Digital Input Test

This test is used to check all digital inputs of therelay. It is a convenient way to determine propersystem connections and verify the operation of alldual optically isolated digital inputs. All digitalinputs should be between 35 and 300 VDC.

Protection can be enabled or disabled, as deemednecessary by the user.


2. Apply DC across DI1 (BG8-BG7). Using the MMIand the INFORMATION - VALUES command,verify that GEN = OFF-LINE.

3. Remove DC from DI1 (BG8-BG7). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that GEN = ON-LINE.

4. Apply DC across DI2 (BG6-BG5). Using the MMIand the INFORMATION - VALUES command,verify that INLET VLV=CLOSED.


5-4

5. Remove DC from DI2 (BG6-BG5). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that INLET VLV=OPEN.

6. Apply DC across DI3 (BG4-BG3). Using the MMIand the INFORMATION - VALUES command,verify that DIG IN 3 = CLOSE.

7. Remove DC from DI3 (BG4-BG3). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that DIG IN 3 = OPEN.

8. Apply DC across DI4 (BG2-BG1). Using the MMIand the INFORMATION - VALUES command,verify that DIG IN 4 = CLOSE.

9. Remove DC from DI4 (BG2-BG1). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that DIG IN 4 = OPEN.

10. Apply DC across DI5 (BE4-BE3). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that OSC TRIG = CLOSE.NOTE: This input is not active on some modelsof DGP.

11. Remove DC from DI5 (BE4-BE3). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that OSC TRIG = OPEN.NOTE: This input is not active on some modelsof DGP.

12. Apply DC across DI6 (BE2-BE1). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that DIG IN 6 = CLOSE.

13. Remove DC from DI6 (BE2-BE1). Using theMMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that DIG IN 6 = OPEN.

T4 - AC System Input Test

This initial test uses the INFORMATION - VALUESfunction of the MMI to determine that the voltagesand currents are applied to the proper connectionson the terminal strip. The INFORMATION -VALUES function can be used at any time duringthe test to verify that the relay has the correctvoltages and currents applied.


2. Using a 60 Hz source set the current (rms) inputsto: IA = 0.5(0.1) A 0° , IB = 2.0(0.4) A -120° , andIC = 15.0(3.0) A -240° and set the voltage (rms)inputs to: VA = 20 V 0° , VB = 70 V -120° , and VC= 120 V -240° .

3. Press the [INF] "information" key on the MMI.Scroll with arrow keys to the "INF: VALUES"heading, then press the [ENT] key. The presentvalues are now selected.

4. With the arrow keys, scroll through the values of:

IAS, ANGLE IASIBS, ANGLE IBSICS, ANGLE ICSIAR, ANGLE IARIBR, ANGLE IBRICR, ANGLE ICRVAN, ANGLE VANVBN, ANGLE VBNVCN, ANGLE VCNGEN FREQ

check that all frequency measurements are within0.01 Hz and all voltage and currentmeasurements are within 3% of their setamplitude and 1 degree of their set phase.

Note: There are other quantities listed betweenthe values of ANGLE VCN and GEN FREQthese will be tested in another section.

If a PC is connected to the DGP system, thepresent values can be read using DGP-LINKsoftware. Alternately, whenever the MMI displayis blank, pressing the [CLR] key willautomatically scroll through all of the presentvalues.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 using the followingfrequencies for your source: 30.5 and 79.5.

5-4 MEASURING UNIT TESTSCAUTION

The test contacts will chatter when the unit undertest is near its threshold. DO NOT LET ITCONTINUE. REMOVE THE TEST CURRENT. Asingle contact closure is enough to determine thatthe unit has picked up or tripped.

Prior to each test there is space provided to recordthe user specific setting for the function under test.

Where appropriate, current levels are defined withtwo numbers as xx(yy); xx is the value to be used forrelays rated at 5 amperes and (yy) is the value to beused for 1 ampere relays.


5-5

T5 - Generator Differential Test, 87G

Settings:87G(203) K1 = ______ %(204) PICKUP (Diff. Current) = ______ A rms

Differential Protection is calculated with thefollowing equation:

| IAR - IAS |2 > (K1/100)*(IAR*IAS) (1)

IAR and IAS are the return and source current forphase A.

The unit should pick up when equation (1) is trueand the differential is greater than the pickupsetting.


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 87G function;"87G ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the in-phase currents of IAR and IAS to makeequation (1) true. This should operate the testpickup and test trip relays. Set the currents ofIAR and IAS to make equation (1) false. Thisshould not operate the test pickup and test triprelays.

T6 - Current Unbalance Alarm, 46A

Settings:46A(302) PICKUP (I2) = ______ A rms(303) TL14 (time delay) = ______ S

Current Unbalance Alarm is calculated with thefollowing equation:

I2 > PICKUP (2)

I2 is equal to the negative-sequence current. Theunit should pick up when I2 > PICKUP. The unitshould trip with time delay as set in TL14 after it haspicked up.



3. Set the negative-sequence current to[PICKUP+0.1(0.02) =______ ] A rms and apply tothe relay. The test pickup relay should operateand TL14 seconds later the test trip relay shouldoperate. Lower the negative-sequence current to

[PICKUP - 0.1(0.02) =______ ] A rms and the testpickup and test trip relays should not operate.

T7 - Current Unbalance Trip, 46T

Settings:46T(403) PICKUP (I2) = ______ A rms(404) K2 (Time Factor) = ______ S

Current Unbalance Trip is calculated with thefollowing equation:

Trip Time = K2 / (I2/Irated)2 (3)

I2 is equal to the negative-sequence current, K2 isequal to the time factor, and Irated is equal to therated current setting (115). The unit should pickup when I2 > PICKUP. If the unit has been pickedup for a time equal to the Trip Time, the test triprelay will operate.



3. Set the negative-sequence current to[PICKUP+0.1(0.02) =______ ] A rms and apply tothe relay. The test pickup relay should operateand the test trip relay should operate after theTrip Time has expired. Lower the negative-sequence current to [PICKUP - 0.1(0.02)=______]A rms and the test pickup and test trip relaysshould not operate.

NOTE:If this test is repeated, the operate time of the tripcontact will change according to how soon the test isrepeated. The trip time can be calculated accordingto the following equation:

New Trip Time = (X/230)*(Original Trip Time)

where X = the time between successive tests, andOriginal Trip Time = the time it took to trip therelay the first time the test was run. If the timebetween successive trips is greater than 230 seconds,the relay will trip in the original trip time.


5-6

T8 - Loss of Excitation, 40-1

Settings:40(501) SELV2SUP = DISABLE (0)

Settings:40-1(603) CENTER (Center of Zone 1) = ______ Ohm(604) RADIUS (Radius of Zone 1) = ______ Ohm(605) TL12 (Time Delay) = ______ S

Loss of Excitation is calculated with the followingequation:

Z = (Va- Vb) / (Ia- Ib) (4)

Va and Vb are vector-phase voltages, Ia and Ib arevector-phase currents, and Z is the correspondingimpedance. If the value of Z falls within the Mhocircle of the relay, the test pickup will operate andthe test trip will operate TL12 seconds later.


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 40-1 function;"40-1 ON" will be displayed on the MMI.Using the MMI and the INFORMATION -VALUES command, verify that EXT VTFF =OPEN.

3. Using a 60 Hz source set the voltage (rms) inputsto: VA = 35 V 0° , VB = 35 V -120° , and VC = 35 V-240° .

4. Set the phase current so that the impedance fallswithin the Mho circle and apply to the relay.The test pickup relay should operate immediatelyand TL12 seconds later the test trip relay shouldoperate. Change the phase current so that theimpedance falls outside the Mho circle, and applyto the relay. The test pickup and test trip relaysshould not operate.

5. Apply DC voltage across DI6 (BE2-BE1). Usingthe MMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that EXT VTFF = CLOSE.

6. Reapply the above phase current that placed theimpedance inside the Mho circle. Verify that thetest pickup operates and the test trip does notoperate.

T9 - Anti-Motoring with AccidentalEnergization and Sequential TripSupervision, 32-1

Settings:32-1(803) SQ TR EN (Seq. Trip Enable) = ______ (Y/N)(804) REV PWR (Reverse Power) = ______ W(805) TL1 (Time Delay) = ______ S

Anti-Motoring is calculated with the followingequation:

P + jQ = Va*Isa + Vb*Isb + Vc*Isc (5)

Va, Vb, and Vc are vector-phase voltages, Isa, Isb andIsc are vector-phase currents, P is the real outputpower, and Q is the imaginary output power. If thevalue of P is greater than the REV PWR setting, thetest pickup will operate. Depending on the state ofDI1, DI2, and the Sequential Trip Enable setting,the test trip will, or will not, operate. See figure 1-1for the logic diagram.



3. Change setting (803) SQ TR EN to YES (1/Y).

4. Set the phase voltages and currents to [REV PWR+ 0.1 =______ ] W and apply to the relay. The testpickup relay should operate immediately.

5. Apply DC to DI2 (BG6-BG5). Using the MMIand the INFORMATION - VALUES command,verify that INLET VLV = CLOSED.

6. The test pickup relay should operate immediatelyand TL1 seconds later the test trip relay shouldoperate.

7. Leaving all of the AC signals applied, remove DCfrom DI2 (BG6-BG5). Using the MMI and theINFORMATION - VALUES command, verify thatINLET VLV=OPEN. Check that the test tripcontact has dropped out.

8. Change setting (803) SQ TR EN to NO (3/N).Leaving all of the AC signals applied, notice thatthe test pickup operates immediately and the testtrip operates in 5.0 - 5.1 seconds.

9. Return setting (803) to its original value.


5-7

T10 - Time Overcurrent with VoltageRestraint, 51V

Settings:51V(1003) PICKUP (Overcurrent Pickup) = ______ A(1004) TIME FAC (Time Factor K) = ______ S

Time Overcurrent is calculated with the followingequation:

Trip Time = K/{[(I*Vnom) / (Ipu*V)]0.5 - 1} (6)

Where: K = Time factorI = Phase currentVnom = Nominal voltageIpu = Pickup level for overcurrentV = Phase to phase voltage

Time Fac is setting (1004), Phase Current is thecurrent applied to any one phase, Nom Volt issetting (114), Pickup is setting (1003), and PhaseVoltage is the voltage in the corresponding phase. Ifthe value of Phase Current is greater than thePickup setting, the test pickup will operate. If thePhase Current is above the Pickup setting for a timeequal to Trip Time, the test trip relay will operate.


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 51V function;"51V ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Using a 60 Hz source set the voltage (rms) inputsto: VA = 70 V 0° , VB = 70 V -120° , and VC = 70 V-240° and set the current input to[PICKUP+0.1(0.02) =______ ] A rms and apply tothe relay. The test pickup relay should operateimmediately and the test trip relay shouldoperate after the Trip Time has expired. Lowerthe current to [PICKUP - 0.1(0.02) =______ ] Arms and the test pickup and test trip relays shouldnot operate.

4. Apply DC voltage across DI6 (BE2-BE1). Usingthe MMI and the INFORMATION - VALUEScommand, verify that EXT VTFF = CLOSE.

5. Set the current input to [PICKUP+0.1(0.02)=______ ] A rms and apply to the relay. Verifythat the test pickup operates but the test trip doesnot operate.

6. While continuing to input the current, removethe DC from DI6 (BE2-BE1). The test pickup

operates immediately and test trip operates afterTRIP TIME expires.


Settings:64G1(1103) PICKUP (Neutral Overvolt.) = ______ V rms(1104) TL4 (Time Delay) = ______ S

Fundamental Frequency Neutral Overvoltage iscalculated with the following equation:

Vn > Pickup (7)

Vn is equal to the neutral voltage. The unit shouldpick up when Vn > Pickup. The unit should tripTL4 seconds after it has picked up.



3. Using a 60 Hz source, set the voltage (rms) inputsto: VA = 70 V 0° and VB = 70 V -120° . Set the VC(paralleled with Vn) to [PICKUP+0.1(0.02)=______ ] V rms and apply to the relay. The testpickup relay should operate, and TL4 secondslater the test trip relay should operate. Lower theVC voltage to [PICKUP - 0.1(0.02) =______ ] Vrms and the test pickup and test trip relays shouldnot operate.



Settings:64G2(1203) TL5 (Time Delay) = ______ S

DIG INP(2501) SELBKDI1 (Blocking Scheme) = ______

Percentage of 3rd Harmonic in the Neutral iscalculated with the following equation:

Vn3 / [(Vp3/3) + Vn3] < 0.15 (8)

Vn3 is the 3rd harmonic voltage in the generatorneutral, and Vp3 is the sum of all 3rd harmonicvoltages in all phases. The unit should pick upwhen equation (8) is true. The unit should tripTL5 seconds after it has picked up.


5-8



3. Set the setting (2501) SELBKDI1 to NO BLK (0).Set the AC inputs using 60Hz for phase A and180Hz for phases B and C. The phase angles forall three signals should be 0°. VA should be 100Vrms and VB and VC (paralleled with Vn) shouldbe changed to make equation (8) true. This willcause the test pickup relay to operate, and TL5seconds later the test trip relay will operate.

4. Change setting (2501) SELBKDI1 to BLK#2 (2).Apply DC voltage across DI1 (BG*-BG7). Re-apply the AC inputs of step 3 and verify that onlythe test pickup operates.

T13 - Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Alarm,24A

Settings:

24A(1302) PICKUP (V/Hz Pickup) = ______(1303) TL6 (V/Hz Time Delay) = ______ S

Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Alarm is calculated withthe following relation:

Actual V/Hz > PICKUP*Vnom/Sysfreq (9)

Actual V/Hz is the voltage applied to any one phasedivided by the frequency applied, Pickup is setting(1302), Vnom is Nominal Voltage (setting (114) /X where X=1.732 or 1, depending on setting (116)WYE or DELTA respectively) and Sysfreq is setting(102). If the equation (9) is satisfied, the testpickup relay will operate. If this condition persistfor a time equal to TL-6, the test trip relay willoperate.



3. Set all current inputs to 0. Set VA = 70 Vrms 0° ,VB = 70 Vrms -120° , and VC = 70 Vrms -240° .Change the voltage of any one phase untilVoltage/Frequency is equal to [V/Hz setting+0.1=______ ]; this will cause the test pickup relay tooperate, and the test trip relay will operate afterthe Trip Time has expired. Change the voltageof any one phase until Voltage/Frequency is

equal to [V/Hz setting - 0.1 =______ ]; the testpickup and test trip relays will not operate.

T14 - Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Trip,24T

Settings:24T(1404) INV CURV (Curve Type) = _____(1405) INV PU (V/Hz Inverse Pickup) = ______(1406) TIME FAC (Time Factor, K) = ______ S(1407) INST PU (V/Hz Pickup) = _____(1408) TL7 (Time Delay for INST PU) = ______ S(1409) RESET (Reset Time between Trips) = ______

Volt/Hertz Overexcitation Trip Time is calculatedwith the following equation:

INVERSE OPERATION

Actual Volts/Hertz > INV PU*Vnom/Sysfreq (10A)

Trip Time = K/[{(Actual V/Hz)/INV PU}N- 1] for inverse curves 1, 2, and 3

or

Trip Time = K for inverse curve 4

N = 2, 1, and 0.5 for curves 1, 2, and 3, respectively.

INSTANTANEOUS OPERATION

Actual Volts/Hertz > INST PU*Vnom/Sysfreq (10B)

Trip Time = TL7

K is the time factor, setting (1406). Both forms ofthe equation (inverse and instantaneous) arecalculated and the relay trips whenever either TripTime has expired. Actual V/Hz is the voltageapplied to any one phase divided by the frequencyapplied, INV PU and INST PU are setting (1405) &(1407) respectively, Vnom is Nominal Voltage(setting (114)/X where X=1.732 or 1, depending onsetting (116) WYE or DELTA respectively) andSysfreq is setting (102). If either equation (10A) or(10B) is satisfied, the test pickup relay will operate.If this condition persist for a time equal to therespective Trip Time, the test trip relay will operate.



3. Set all current inputs to 0. Set VA = 70 Vrms 0° ,VB = 70 Vrms -120° , and VC = 70 Vrms -240° .Change the voltage of any one phase until


5-9

Voltage/Frequency is equal to [Inverse or Inst.V/Hz setting +0.1 =______ ]. This will cause thetest pickup relay to operate, and the test trip relaywill operate after the appropriate Trip Time hasexpired. Change the voltage of any one phaseuntil Voltage/Frequency is equal to [Inverse orInst. V/Hz setting - 0.1 =______ ]. The testpickup and test trip relays will not operate.

NOTE:

If this test is repeated, the operate time of the tripcontact will change according to how soon the test isrepeated. The trip time can be calculated accordingto the following equation:

New Trip Time = (X/Reset)*(Original Trip Time)

where X = the time between successive tests, OriginalTrip Time = the time it originally took to trip therelay, and Reset = Setting (1409). If the timebetween successive trips is greater than the Resettime, the relay will trip in the original trip time.

T15 - Positive Sequence Overvoltage,59

Settings:59(1503) PICKUP (Phase-Phase Voltage)=______ Vrms(1504) TIME FAC (Time Factor, K) = ______ S

Trip time is calculated using the following equation:

Trip Time = K / [(V1/PICKUP) - 1] (11)

K is setting (1504), V1 is the positive-sequencevoltage applied phase to phase, and PICKUP issetting (1503). If the value of V1 is greater thanPickup, the test pickup will operate. If the value ofV1is greater than Pickup for a time equal to TripTime, the test trip relay will operate.



3. Set all current inputs to 0. Apply a signal to allthree phases with a positive-sequence phase-phasevoltage equal to [PICKUP+2 =______ ]. This willcause the test pickup to operate and the test tripwill operate after the Trip Time has expired.Lower the positive-sequence voltage to [PICKUP -2 =______ ]. This will prevent the test pickup andthe test trip relays from operating.

T16 - Underfrequency Unit #1, 81-1U

Settings:81-1U(1703) SET PNT (Set Point for Min Freq)= ______ Hz(1704) TL8 (Time Delay) = ______ S

Underfrequency is calculated with the followingequation:

Input Frequency < SET PNT (12)

Input Frequency is equal to the frequency in anyphase. The unit should pick up when equation (12)is true. The unit should trip TL8 seconds after ithas picked up.



3. Set all current inputs to 0. Set the voltage (rms)inputs to: VA = 70V 0° , VB = 70V -120° , and VC =70V -240° . Set the frequency at [SET PNT + 0.04=______ ]. This will prevent the test pickup andthe test trip from operating. Change thefrequency to [SET PNT - 0.04 =______ ]. Thiswill cause the test pickup relay to operate and thetest trip relay will operate TL8 seconds later.


Settings:81-1O(2103) SET PNT (Set Point for Max Freq= ______ Hz(2104) TL15 (Time Delay) = ______ S

Overfrequency is calculated with the followingequation:

Input Frequency > SET PNT (13)

Input Frequency is equal to the frequency in anyphase. The unit should pick up when equation (13)is true. The unit should trip TL15 seconds after ithas picked up.



3. Set all current inputs to 0. Set the voltage (rms)inputs to: VA = 70V 0° , VB = 70V -120° , and VC =70V -240° . Set the frequency at [SET PNT -0.04 =______ ]. This will prevent the test pickupand the test trip from operating. Change the


5-10

frequency to [SET PNT + 0.04 =______ ]. Thiswill cause the test pickup relay to operate and thetest trip relay will operate TL15 seconds later.

T18- Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure,VTFF

Settings:DIG INP(2501) SELBKDI1 = NO BLK (0)

VTFF(2601) VTFF = ENABLE (1)


2. Set up relay in test mode for the VTFF function;"VTFF ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the current (rms) inputs to: IAS = 0.5A 90° ,IBS = 0.5A -30° , and ICS = 0.5A -150° . Set thevoltage (rms) inputs to: VA = 70V 0° , VB = 70V -120° , and VC = 70V -240° . Verify that neitherthe test pickup nor the test trip operates.

4. Decrease the voltage in all three phases to 49Vrms. Verify that test pickup operates, and thattest trip operates in 12.4 to 13.0 seconds.

T19 - TOC Ground Overcurrent, 51GN


Settings:51GN(2803) PICKUP (Ground Current Pickup)= ______A(2804) TIME FAC (Time Factor, K) = ______ S

Time Overcurrent is calculated with the followingequation:

Trip Time= K/{[Ground Current/PICKUP]0.5 - 1} (14)

K is setting (2804), Ground Current is the currentapplied to neutral side (INR), and PICKUP issetting (2803). If the value of Ground Current isgreater than the Pickup setting, the test pickup willoperate. If the Ground Current is above the Pickupsetting for a time equal to Trip Time, the test triprelay will operate.


2. Set up relay in test mode for the 51GN function;"51GN ON" will be displayed on the MMI.

3. Set the current input to [PICKUP + 0.1(0.02)=______ ] A rms. Set the voltage (rms) inputs to:VA = 70V 0° , VB = 70V -120° , and VC = 70V -240° . The test pickup relay should operateimmediately and the test trip relay shouldoperate after the Trip Time has expired. Lowerthe current to [ PICKUP - 0.1(0.02) =______ ] Arms and the test pickup and test trip relays shouldnot operate.

T20- Positive Sequence Undervoltage,27


Settings:27(2903) PICKUP (Phase-Phase Voltage)= ______V rms(2904) TIME FAC (Time Factor, K) = ______ S(2905) CURVE # (Characteristic curve) = ______

Trip time for the function is calculated usingequation (15):

Trip Time = K / [(PICKUP/V1) - 1] (15)for CURVE # = 1

or

Trip Time = K for CURVE # = 2

K is setting (2904), V1 is the positive-sequencevoltage applied phase to phase, and PICKUP issetting (2903). If the value of Phase Voltage is lowerthan Pickup, the test pickup will operate. If thePhase Voltage is lower than Pickup for a time equalto Trip Time, the test trip relay will operate.



3. Set all current inputs to 0. Apply a signal to allthree phases with a positive-sequence phase-phasevoltage equal to [PICKUP - 2 =______ ]. This willcause the test pickup to operate and the test tripwill operate after the Trip Time has expired.Raise the positive-sequence voltage to [PICKUP +2=______ ]. This will prevent the test pickup andthe test trip relays from operating.


5-11

5-9 END OF TESTMake sure that the relay is no longer in test mode;select END TEST MODE from the test mode menu.

Print out or scroll through all of the settings.Compare them with the initial Settings of the relay,and change to initial values.

If the initial settings were saved to a disk file beforetesting using DGP-LINK, download the file to therelay.

CAUTIONWhen testing is completed, verify that all settings arereturned to your specified values. It is helpful toprint out the settings and check them one by one.


6-1

Chapter 6 - SERVICING

CHAPTER 6 - SERVICING................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

TABLE OF TABLES.............................................................................................................................................................. 6-1

6-1 SPARES........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2

6-2 RELAY SELF-TEST........................................................................................................................................................ 6-2

6-3 TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................................................................................................... 6-5Using the Information Status Command............................................................................................................................... 6-5

6-4 SERVICING A CRITICAL FAILURE "FAIL".................................................................................................................. 6-5Locating the defective module ............................................................................................................................................. 6-6

6-5 SERVICING A NON-CRITICAL FAILURE "WARN"..................................................................................................... 6-6Locating the defective module ............................................................................................................................................. 6-6

6-6 SERVICING SYSTEM "STATUS" FAILURES................................................................................................................ 6-6

TABLE OF TABLES

TABLE 6-1 START-UP SELF TESTS............................................................................................................................................. 6-3TABLE 6-2 RUN TIME BACKGROUND SELF TESTS....................................................................................................................... 6-3TABLE 6-3 RUN TIME FOREGROUND SELF TESTS....................................................................................................................... 6-4TABLE 6-4 SYSTEM STATUS ERROR MESSAGES.......................................................................................................................... 6-5TABLE 6-5 MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES.................................................................................................................................... 6-6TABLE 6-6 ERROR MESSAGES AT STARTUP................................................................................................................................ 6-7TABLE 6-7 ERROR MESSAGES AT RUNTIME................................................................................................................................ 6-9

GEK-100666 Chapter 6 - Servicing

6-2

6-1 SPARESThere are two possible servicing methods for theDGP system. They are: spare module replacementand component level repair. The preferred methodis module replacement using the DGP system'sautomatic self-tests to isolate failed modules. Whenthe defective module is found, it can be replacedwith a spare, and the system can be returned toservice. This method typically yields the shortest"down time" of the system. To further reduce "downtime" it is recommended that a complete set of sparemodules be kept at the maintenance center.

It is not recommended that the relay be serviced atthe component level. This requires a substantialinvestment in test/repair equipment, and intechnical expertise, and usually results in longer"down times" than module replacement. For thosewho do wish to trouble-shoot to the componentlevel, drawings can be obtained by requesting themfrom the factory. When requesting drawings, thefollowing information must be supplied to thefactory:

1. The model number of the module. This is foundon the lower part of the front nameplate of eachmodule, e.g. MGM781

2. The assembly number of the module. This isfound on the component side of the printedcircuit board. It is an eight digit number with aletter inserted between the fourth and fifth digitand suffixed with a group identification, e.g.0215B8012G001.

3. The revision number. This is found on theprinted circuit board adjacent to the assemblynumber of the board.

CAUTIONPower down the relay by removing the test plugs orturn OFF the PS1 & PS2 switches before removingor inserting modules. Failure to do so canpermanently damage the relay.

6-2 RELAY SELF-TESTThe DGP system automatically performs tests ofmajor functions and critical hardware componentsand reports their status via the MMI Display and thenon-critical and critical alarm contacts. The failurereport is dependent on the type or level of thefailure. Some failures will operate the critical alarmcontact and the STATUS LED, while others willonly operate the non-critical alarm contact.

There are three levels of self-test performed by therelay. The first level indicates severe relayingfailures. They are indicated by a "FAIL" message onthe MMI, a de-energizing of the "critical alarm"relay, and by the STATUS LED turning red. Thesefailures are the most critical because they indicatethat the relay is not providing protection.

The second level of self-test displays warningmessages. They are indicated by a "WARN" messageon the MMI, and energizing of the "non-criticalalarm" relay. These failures are a less criticalcondition, where the relay is still providing somedegree of protection.

The third level of tests indicate "System Status"errors that are due to power system errors (TripCircuit Open), or caused by the use of a DGPcommand that disables the relay (Disable Outputs).They are indicated by the "non-critical alarm" relaybeing energized, a red LED, or by the "criticalalarm" relay being de-energized. However, no MMIdisplay is provided until the "Information Status"command is used.

The types of self-tests performed are described in thePRODUCT DESCRIPTION section of this manual.The components tested during the start-up self-testsare listed in Table 6-1. The components testedduring run time background and foreground self-tests are listed in Tables 6-2 and 6-3, respectively.


6-3

Table 6-1 Start-Up Self Tests

COMPONENT METHOD PROCESSOR NATUREPROM CRC-type check on DAP

and SSP; checksum on DSPAll Critical

Local RAM Patterns to check for stuckbits, stuck address lines,cross-talk between adjacentbits

All Critical

Shared RAM Same as Local RAM All CriticalNon- volatile RAM CRC-type check on settings

area; CRC-type check onserial NVRAM in DAP;checksum on fault storagearea

SSPDAP

Critical if settings area orSerial NVRAM

Timer Chip Test all processor timersand their interrupts

DAPSSP

Critical if DAP, Non-Critical ifSSP

Interrupt Chips Test all processor andexternal InterruptControllers

DAPSSP

Critical

Serial Chips Wrap around and Interrupttests for serial interface

SSP Non-Critical

A/D Controller DMA Interface DAP Critical, DGP will restartDigital Output Circuitry Loop-back via parallel port SSP Critical, DGP will restartReal Time Clock Test of real time clock

Operation and InterruptsSSP Non-Critical

LED display Self-test built in bymanufacturer

SSP Non-critical

Table 6-2 Run Time Background Self Tests

COMPONENT METHOD PROCESSOR NATUREPROM CRC-type check on DAP

and SSP; checksum on DSPAll Critical, Restart

RAM CRC-type check on areasholding settings

All Critical, Restart

Non- volatile RAM CRC-type check on settingsarea; checksum on faultstorage area

SSP Critical if settings area

Timer Chip Test that all timers arecounting

DAPSSP

Critical if DAP, Non-Critical ifSSP

Power Supply Monitor Supply Healthcontact output

SSP Critical if no backup supply


6-4

Table 6-3 Run Time Foreground Self Tests

COMPONENT METHOD PROCESSOR NATUREA/D Controller DMA Interface DAP CriticalDigital Input Circuitry Comparison of bits read via

2 separate opto- couplersDAPSSP

Non-Critical

Digital Output Circuitry Loop-back via parallel port SSP Critical, RestartTrip Voltage Monitor Bit read via parallel port SSP Non-CriticalMMI Operator-initiated, visual

feedbackSSP Non-Critical

DSP and DAPCommunication

DSP finished flag DAP Critical

ANI Current Summation Check DSP CriticalANI Ground and Reference

range checkDAP Critical

Power Supply Range check +12V, _12V DAPSSP

Critical if no backup supply


6-5

6-3 TROUBLESHOOTINGTrouble shooting the relay requires three steps. Thefirst step is to determine the type of failure. Thetype is either a critical, non-critical, or a system-status failure. Next, the list of failure codes, warningcodes or the "Information Status" command is usedto determine what module is defective. Lastly, thedefective module is replaced in accordance withsafety and static-discharge precautions.

The troubleshooting sections are as follows:

1. Servicing a Critical Failure "FAIL"

2. Servicing a Non-Critical Failure "WARN"

3. Servicing a System Status Failure

NOTE: Refer to the ACCEPTANCE TEST sectionfor test of the MMI display, keypad, and printer port,and of the measuring units.

Using the Information StatusCommand

Tables 6-6 and 6-7 have been provided as a listing ofall the "FAIL" and "WARN" messages. They can beused to decode "Fail xxx" and "Warn xxx" codes.The "Information Status" command can also beused to extract the same data from the MMI displaywithout looking up the code on the table. The"Information Status" command can be used at therelay site, or remotely over a modem link.

The INFORMATION STATUS command is invokedas follows:

1. Apply rated DC power to the relay and wait forinitialization to complete.

2. Press the [INF] key. Then scroll with the arrowkeys until the heading "INF: STATUS" isdisplayed. (If you have a printer, press the [PRT]key.)

3. Press the [ENT] key.

The display will indicate that there is a failurewith the words "STATUS: FAIL".

4. Press the "Up Arrow" key to get a detailed reportof the failure. A complete list of the possibleerrors is shown in Tables 6-4, 5, and 6 below.

The "FAIL" and "WARN" messages are alsoincluded. Their descriptions can also bedisplayed on the MMI, by using the "InformationStatus" command.

NOTE: After initial power up or loss of powerexceeding 24 hours, the time and date will reset to00:00:00 01/01/90. All event and fault data will bereset.

Table 6-4 System Status Error Messages

SYSTEMSTATUSERROR

INDICATION DESCRIPTION

WARN NCA WARN condition,press up arrow

FAIL CA/LED FAIL condition,press up arrow

MISC LED Miscellaneouscondition, press uparrow

NOTE: LED = A red LED on the MMI,NCA = energizing the non-critical alarm relay,CA = de-energizing the critical alarm relay

6-4 SERVICING A CRITICALFAILURE "FAIL"

A critical failure indicates total interruption of theprotection function. When an extended failure isdetected on one of the modules (excluding thepower supply) the critical alarm relay will drop out,and the MMI LED will turn red. Remove and re-apply the DC power to bring up the FAIL messageon the display. If the DGP system successfullyrestarts, the LED will turn green.

The FAIL message has the format "FAIL xxx". The"xxx" field following the word "FAIL" is the numericcode that indicates the nature of the critical failure.The FAIL message remains on the display until akey is pressed or until the DGP system restartssuccessfully (with no self-test failures).

NOTE: As an alternative, the "Information Status"command can be used to display the failuretype directly on the MMI.

A Failure message may appear in the Events or onthe display, but not be displayed from "InformationStatus". This is the result of a Removable CriticalAlarm, "REMCRIT" in Table 6-6 and 6-7. This iscaused by the DGP system detecting a critical alarm,


6-6

then later detecting that the condition has clearedup, and thus being able to restore protection.

Locating the defective module

Use Tables 6-6 or 6-7, or the "Information Status"command, to isolate the cause of the failure. Whenthe suspected module is found, power down the unitand replace it. Re-apply power. If the "FAIL"message is gone, then the unit has been successfullyrepaired. If the message has changed, it is possiblethat another module requires replacement.

6-5 SERVICING A NON-CRITICALFAILURE "WARN"

A non-critical failure indicates a possibleinterruption in the relay's protection, but not a totalloss. When a WARN condition occurs, the DGPsystem's non-critical alarm contact will close. TheLED will remain green. Turn off the DC inputpower, then re-apply. The "WARN XXX" messageshould appear if the failure still exists.

The WARN message has the format "WARN xxx".The "xxx" field following the word "WARN" is thenumeric code that indicates the nature of thefailure. The WARN message remains on the displayuntil a key is pressed or until the DGP system restartssuccessfully (with no self-test failures). See Table 6-6for the list of Warning codes and their meanings.

NOTE: As an alternative to using the table ofwarnings, the "Information Status"command can be used to display thewarning type directly on the MMI.

A Failure message may appear in the Events or onthe display, but not be displayed from "InformationStatus". This is the result of a Removable Non-Critical Alarm, "REMNONCRIT" in Table 6-7. Thisis caused by the DGP system detecting a non-critical

alarm, then later detecting that the condition hascleared up, and thus being able to restoreprotection.

Locating the defective module

Use Tables 6-6 or 6-7, or the "Information Status"command to isolate the cause of the failure. Powerdown the unit and replace the suspected module ifappropriate. Re-apply power and the WARNmessage should clear. If the WARN message is gone,then the unit has been successfully repaired. If themessage has changed, it is possible that anothermodule requires replacement.

Table 6-5 Miscellaneous Messages

MiscellaneousMessage

Description Indication

PROT OFF Protection off LEDDIS OUTS Outputs Disabled LEDRELAY TEST Relay in Test

ModeLED

D O TEST Digital Outputtest

LED

6-6 SERVICING SYSTEM"STATUS" FAILURES

A system failure is one that indicates a failure of apower system input, or indicates that the relay hasbeen disabled by a user command. They areindicated by the "non-critical alarm" contacts, by ared LED, or by the "critical alarm" contacts.However, no MMI display is provided until the"Information Status" command is used.

Turn off the DC input power, then re-apply. Thenon-critical alarm contact(n.o.) will be closed if thefailure still exists. Use the "Information Status" todetermine the cause of the trouble.


6-7

Table 6-6 Error Messages at Startup

Err# Board Alarm Inf Status/Display Inf Status/Print100 DAP Critical DAP:PROM DAP BOARD:PROM101 DAP Critical DAP:LOCAL RAM DAP BOARD:LOCAL RAM103 DAP Critical DAP:DSPRAM DAP BOARD:DSPRAM104 DAP Critical DAP:SYSRAM DAP BOARD:SYSRAM105 DAP Critical DAP:INTERRUPT DAP BOARD:INTERUPT106 DAP Critical DAP:TIMER DAP BOARD:TIMER124 DAP Critical DAP:VERSION NUM DAP BOARD:VERSION

NUMBER207 DSP Critical DSP1:PROM DSP BOARD1:PROM208 DSP Critical DSP1:LOCAL RAM DSP BOARD1:LOCAL RAM209 DSP Critical DSP1:DSPRAM DSP BOARD1:DSPRAM210 DAP Remcrit DAP:NO DSP 1 RSP DAP BOARD:NO DSP 1

RESPONSE225 DSP Critical DSP1:VERSION

NUMDSP BOARD:DSP1VERSION NUMBER

226 DSP Critical DSP2:PROM DSP BOARD:DSP2 PROM227 DSP Critical DSP2:LOCAL RAM DSP BOARD:DSP2 LOCAL

RAM228 DSP Critical DSP2:DSPRAM DSP BOARD:DSP2 DSPRAM229 DAP Remcrit DAP:NO DSP 2 RSP DAP BOARD:NO DSP 2



231 DSP Critical DSP3:PROM DSP BOARD:DSP3 PROM232 DSP Critical DSP3:LOCAL RAM DSP BOARD:DSP3 LOCAL

RAM233 DSP Critical DSP3:DSPRAM DSP BOARD:DSP3 DSPRAM234 DAP Remcrit DAP:NO DSP 3 RSP DAP BOARD:NO DSP 3



311 ANI Critical ANI:CONTROLLER ANI BOARD:CONTROLLER312 ANI Critical ANI:SERIAL

MEMRYANI BOARD:SERIALMEMORY

336 ANI Critical ANI:GROUND ANI BOARD:GROUNDFAILURE


6-8

Table 6-6 Error Messages at Startup (continued)

414 MGM Critical MGM1:SERIAL MEM MGM BOARD1:SERIALMEMORY

422 MGM Critical MGM1:MODEL NUM MGM BOARD1:MODELNUMBER

449 MGM Critical MGM2:SERIAL MEM MGM BOARD2:SERIALMEMORY

450 MGM Critical MGM2:MODEL NUM MGM BOARD2:MODELNUMBER

515 SSP Critical SSP:PROM SSP BOARD:PROM516 SSP Critical SSP:LOCAL RAM SSP BOARD:LOCAL RAM518 SSP Critical SSP:SYSRAM SSP BOARD:SYSRAM519 SSP Critical SSP:INTERRUPT SSP BOARD:INTERRUPT520 SSP Remcrit SSP:EEPROM SSP BOARD:EEPROM523 SSP Critical SSP:VERSION NUM SSP BOARD:VERSION

NUMBER553 SSP Critical SSP: SET RANGE SSP BOARD SETTING

RANGE556 SSP Noncrit SSP:TIMER SSP BOARD:TIMER557 SSP Noncrit SSP:CAPRAM SSP BOARD:CAPRAM558 SSP Noncrit SSP:CLOCK SSP BOARD:REAL TIME

CLOCK621 MMI Critical MMI:DIG OUT MMI BOARD:DIGITAL

OUTPUT655 MMI Noncrit MMI:SERIAL CHP 1 MMI BOARD:SERIAL CHIP

#1659 MMI Noncrit MMI:LED DISPLAY MMI BOARD:LED DISPLAY663 MMI Noncrit MMI:SERIAL CHP 2 MMI BOARD:SERIAL CHIP

#2664 MMI Noncrit MMI:SERIAL CHP 3 MMI BOARD:SERIAL CHIP

#3


6-9

Table 6-7 Error Messages at Runtime

Err# Board Alarm Inf Status/Display Inf Status/Print 60 MISC Noncrit LOGON FAILURE LOGON FAILURE 71 MISC Noncrit CASE GND

SHORTEDCASE TO GND SHORTED

100 DAP Crit+Wdreset DAP:PROM DAP BOARD:PROM102 DAP Crit+Wdreset DAP:DSPRAM DAP BOARD:DSPRAM106 DAP Crit+Wdreset DAP:TIMER DAP BOARD:TIMER207 DSP Remcrit DSP1:PROM DSP BOARD1:PROM209 DSP Remcrit DSP1:DSPRAM DSP BOARD1:DSPRAM210 DAP Remcrit DAP:NO DSP 1 RSP DAP BOARD:NO DSP 1

RESPONSE226 DSP Remcrit DSP2:PROM DSP BOARD2:PROM228 DSP Remcrit DSP2:DSPRAM DSP BOARD2:DSPRAM229 DAP Remcrit DAP:NO DSP 2 RSP DAP BOARD:NO DSP 2

RESPONSE231 DSP Remcrit DSP3:PROM DSP BOARD3:PROM233 DSP Remcrit DSP3:DSPRAM DSP BOARD3:DSPRAM234 DAP Remcrit DAP:NO DSP 3 RSP DAP BOARD:NO DSP 3

RESPONSE246 DSP Remcrit DSP1:SET CHKSUM DSP BOARD1:SETTING

VERSION247 DSP Remcrit DSP2:SET CHKSUM DSP BOARD2:SETTING

VERSION248 DSP Remcrit DSP3:SET CHKSUM DSP BOARD3:SETTING

VERSION313 ANI Remcrit ANI:REFERENCE ANI BOARD:REFERENCE336 ANI Remcrit ANI:GROUND ANI BOARD:GROUND

FAILURE351 ANI Remcrit ANI:CURRENT SUM ANI BOARD:CURRENT

SUM FAILURE352 ANI Crit+Wdreset ANI:CHAN

SATURATANI BOARD:CHANNELSATURATED

373 ANI Remnoncrit _ ANI BOARD: SAMPLECORRECTED

515 SSP Crit+Wdreset SSP:PROM SSP BOARD:PROM517 SSP Crit+Wdreset SSP:SYSRAM CRC SSP BOARD:SYSRAM CRC520 SSP Noncrit SSP:EEPROM SSP BOARD:EEPROM556 SSP Noncrit SSP:TIMER SSP BOARD:TIMER557 SSP Noncrit SSP:CAPRAM SSP BOARD:CAPRAM


6-10

Table 6-7 Error Messages at Runtime (continued)

621 MMI Crit+Wdreset MMI:DIG OUT MMI BOARD:DIGITALOUTPUT

737 PS Remcrit PS1 + 2: SELFTEST POWER SUPPLY 1 & 2:FAILURE SELFTEST

738 PS Remcrit PS1+2:+12V BAD POWER SUPPLY 1 AND2:(FAIL) +12V BAD

739 PS Remcrit PS1+2:_12V BAD POWER SUPPLY 1 AND2:(FAIL) _12V BAD

740 PS Remcrit PS1 + 2: SELFTEST POWER SUPPLY 1 & 2:FAILURE SELFTEST

741 PS Remcrit PS1+2:+12V BAD POWER SUPPLY 1 AND2:(FAIL) +12V BAD

742 PS Remcrit PS1+2:_12V BAD POWER SUPPLY 1 AND2:(FAIL) _12V BAD

743 PS Remcrit PS:SELFTEST POWER SUPPLY:(FAILURE)SELFTEST

744 PS Remcrit PS:+12V BAD POWER SUPPLY:(FAILURE)+12V BAD

745 PS Remcrit PS:_12V BAD POWER SUPPLY:(FAILURE)_12V BAD

765 PS Remnoncrit PS1:SELFTEST POWER SUPPLY1:(WARNING SELFTEST)

766 PS Remnoncrit PS1:+12V BAD POWER SUPPLY1:(WARNING) +12V BAD

767 PS Remnoncrit PS1:_12V BAD POWER SUPPLY1:(WARNING) _12V BAD

768 PS Remnoncrit PS2:SELFTEST POWER SUPPLY2:(WARNING SELFTEST)

769 PS Remnoncrit PS2:+12V BAD POWER SUPPLY2:(WARNING) +12V BAD

770 PS Remnoncrit PS2:_12V BAD POWER SUPPLY2:(WARNING) _12V BAD

972 DIT Noncrit DIT:DIG INP DIT BOARD:DIGITALINPUT

GEK-100666 Table Contents

7-1

Chapter 7 - SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 7 - SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-1 RATINGS......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7-2 BURDENS........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2

7-3 CONTACT DATA............................................................................................................................................................ 7-3

7-4 INTERFACE DATA......................................................................................................................................................... 7-3

7-5 ACCURACY.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3

7-6 DIMENSIONS.................................................................................................................................................................. 7-3

7-7 WEIGHT.......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3

7-8 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS & SETTING RANGES....................................................................................................... 7-4

GEK-100666 Chapter 7 - Specifications

7-2

7-1 RATINGSNominal Frequency 50 / 60 HertzNominal Voltage (phase to phase) 140 VACRated Current In = 1 or 5 AmperesDC Control Voltage 48VDC, Operating Range 38.5-60 VDC

110/125VDC, Operating Range 88-150 VDC220/250VDC, Operating Range 176-300 VDC

Maximum Permissible CurrentContinuousThree SecondsOne Second

2 X In50 X In100 X In

Maximum Permissible AC VoltageContinuousOne minute (one per hour)

2 X Rated3.5 X Rated

Ambient temperature RangeStorageOperation

-30°C to +70°C-20°C to +55°C

Humidity 95% without condensationInsulation Test Voltage 2kV 50/60 Hz, one minute

2.8kVDC, one minuteImpulse Voltage Withstand 5kV peak, 1.2/50 microseconds, 0.5 joulesInterference Test Withstand SWC, per ANSI C37.90.1Vibration Test Withstand IEC 255-21-1

7-2 BURDENSCurrent Circuits 0.022 ohm, 5°, In=5 amps

0.12 ohm, 30°, In=1 ampsVoltage Circuits 0.30 VA, 60 Hz

0.40 VA, 50 HzDC Battery (power supply) 19 Watts with 1 supply

25 Watts with 2 suppliesDC Battery (for contact converters) 1 milliampere at 48 V

1.5 milliamperes at 125 V2.5 milliamperes at 250 V


7-3

7-3 CONTACT DATATrip Outputs 4 Programmable Relays with two Form A contacts eachTrip Output Contacts Continuous Rating = 3 amperes

Make and carry for tripping duty = 30 amperes, (per ANSI C37.90).Break 60 VA inductive, maximum 250 volts or 0.5 ampere

Alarm Outputs 4 Programmable Relays with one Form C contact each1 Critical Self-Test Alarm1 Non-Critical Self-Test Alarm1 VT Fuse Failure Alarm1 Power Supply Alarm per Power Supply(Two Power Supply Alarms maximum)

Auxiliary Contacts(Including Alarms)

Continuous Rating = 3 amperesMake and carry for 30 seconds = 5 amperesBreak 60 VA inductive, maximum 250 volts or 0.5 ampere.

Trip Current Monitor Sensitivity 150 milliamperesTrip Voltage Monitor 38 - 300 VDCDigital Inputs 38 - 300 VDC, 1-3 milliamperes

7-4 INTERFACE DATASystem Interface RS232 port-rear panel

RS232 port-front panelPrinter Interface (serial) -rear panel�IRIG-B (demodulated) for Time Synchronization�

� Indicates an optional function. Refer to DGP nomenclature selection guide for available functions in a specific model.

7-5 ACCURACYRMS Measurements ± 3%Phase Angle Measurements ± 1°Frequency Measurements ± 0.01 HzTimers ± 3% of setting or 10-40 milliseconds, which ever is greaterData Sample Time Tag Resolution ± 1 millisecond

7-6 DIMENSIONSHeight 14 inches (352 millimeters; Standard 8 rack unit)Width 19.0 inches (484 millimeters; Standard 19 inch rack)Depth 14 inches (356 millimeters)

7-7 WEIGHTWeight 51 pounds (23 kilograms)


7-4

7-8 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS & SETTING RANGESRANGE

FUNCTION SETTING 5 AMP 1 AMP� STEP

Differential (87G) Differential Current Pickup 0.20 - 1.00 amp 0.04 - 0.20 amp 0.01Current Unbalance (46) Negative Sequence Current

Machine Constant - K20.05 - 2.99 amp1.0 - 45.0

0.01 - 0.60 amp 0.010.1

Loss of Excitation (40)(Two Independent Zones)

Zone 1 & Zone 2 CenterZone 1 & Zone 2 RadiusZone 1 & Zone 2 Timer

2.5 - 60ohms2.5 - 60ohms0.01 - 9.99 sec

12.5 - 300 ohms12.5 - 300 ohms

0.010.010.01

Anti-Motoring (32)(Two Independent Steps)�

Reverse PowerTime Delay (step 1)Time Delay (step 2) �

0.5 - 99.9 watts1 - 120 sec1 - 60 sec

0.1 - 19.9 watt 0.11

Stator Ground (64G1)(Fundamental frequency)

Zone 1 Neutral OV PickupZone 1 Timer

4.0 - 40.0 volt0.1 - 9.9 sec

0.10.1

Stator Ground (64G2) �(Third Harmonic comparator)

Zone 2 Timer 0.1 - 9.9 sec 0.1

Stator Ground (27TN)(Third Harmonic UV)

Voltage PickupTime DelayForward Power Limit - LowForward Power Limit - High

0.1 - 9.9 volt0.5 - 99.9 sec0 - 999 watt0 - 999 watt

0 - 200 watt0 - 200 watt

0.10.111

Overexcitation (24) V/Hz Pickup (Inverse)Time Factor (Inverse)V/Hz Pickup (Instantaneous)Timer (Instantaneous)Rate of Reset Timer

1.00 - 1.99 per unit0.10 - 99.99 sec1.00 - 1.99 per unit0 - 9.9 sec0 - 999 sec

0.010.010.010.11

Overvoltage (59) Voltage Pickup (Inv.)Time FactorVoltage Pickup (Inst.) �

100 - 200 volt �0.10 - 99.99 sec100 - 300 volt �

10.01

1Over/Underfrequency (81)(2 or 4 Independent Steps) �

Set Point (Under)Set Point (Over)Timer (Each Step)

40.00 - 65.00 Hz45.00 - 79.99 Hz0.05 - 99.99 sec�

0.10.1

0.01System Backup (51V) Phase Time OC Pickup

Time Factor0.5 - 16 amp0.10 - 99.99 sec

0.1 - 3.2 amp 0.10.01

Ground Overcurrent (51GN) � Ground Time OC PickupTime Factor

0.10 - 5.00 amp0.1 - 99.99 sec

0.02 - 1.00 amp 0.010.01

Undervoltage (27) � Voltage PickupTime Factor

40 - 120 volt �0.10 - 99.99 sec

10.01

� Unless otherwise noted, setting ranges of 1 amp model are same as for 5 amp model.� Indicates an optional function. Refer to DGP nomenclature selection guide for available functions in a specific model.� Timer range for Under Frequency Step 1 is 0.1-999.9 sec.� Wider range available in DGP***ACA, refer to Table 2-1 for detail.


8-1

Chapter 8 - INTERFACE

CHAPTER 8 - INTERFACE.................................................................................................................................................. 8-1

TABLE OF FIGURES............................................................................................................................................................. 8-1

8-1 LOCAL MAN MACHINE INTERFACE (MMI) OPERATION........................................................................................ 8-2DISPLAY............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2TARGET LEDs.................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2TARGET RESET KEY.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-2KEYPAD............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2

CLEAR Key (CLR)............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2PRINT Key (PRT)............................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3ENTER Key (ENT)............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-3DATA ENTRY KEYS......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3END Key............................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-4PASSWORDS..................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4SETTINGS Key (SET)........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-4ACTIONS Key (ACT)......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-51. Disable Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-52. Enable Outputs............................................................................................................................................................................... 8-53. Trip................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-54. Reset.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-65. Date/Time...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-66. Relay Test...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-67. MMI Test....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-68. Fix Up Settings CRC...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-79. Enter Password .............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-710. Change Password........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-711. Digital Output Test....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-8INFORMATION Key (INF)................................................................................................................................................................. 8-81. Request DGP Status ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-82. Request Fault Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-83. Request Present Values .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-94. Request Events............................................................................................................................................................................... 8-95. View Password............................................................................................................................................................................... 8-96. Request DGP Model/Version......................................................................................................................................................... 8-97. Station Id....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-98. Generator Id................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-9

ERROR MESSAGES............................................................................................................................................................ 8-9

8-2 REMOTE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE................................................................................................................8-11HARDWARE JUMPERS....................................................................................................................................................8-11MODEM CONNECTIONS AND SETTINGS......................................................................................................................8-11NULL MODEM CONNECTIONS......................................................................................................................................8-13

TABLE OF FIGURESFIGURE 8-1 SETTING KEY MENU.......................................................................................................................................8-14FIGURE 8-2 ACTION KEY MENU........................................................................................................................................8-15FIGURE 8-3 INFORMATION KEY MENU............................................................................................................................ 8-16FIGURE 8-4 CABLE WIRING FOR DGP COMMUNICATIONS...........................................................................................8-17

GEK-100666 Chapter 8 - Interface

8-2

8-1 LOCAL MAN MACHINEINTERFACE (MMI) OPERATION

DISPLAY

The display consists of 16 LED alphanumeric charac-ter positions arranged side-by-side horizontally.There are also 19 Target LEDs and 1 Status LED.

All messages on the display are the result of somekeypad action, with four exceptions: the Trip mes-sage when the DGP system has caused a protectivetrip, the Fail message when the DGP system has dis-covered a critical self-test failure, the Warning mes-sage when the DGP system has discovered a non-critical self-test failure, and the Initialization messagewhen the DGP system is initializing during a powerup.

All messages other than the Trip message are dis-played at the same intensity, about half of full-intensity. User input for setting changes is echoed ata lower intensity to help distinguish the stored set-ting value from one that has not yet been enteredinto the DGP system.

The Trip message is displayed at highest intensityand has the following format: "TRIP xxx xxx". Theword "TRIP" blinks to indicate that the DGP systemhas caused a protective trip. The two fields of infor-mation following the word "TRIP" are non-blinkingand contain the following information: a three-character fault type (e.g. ABC) and a three-charactertrip type (see section 2, Request Fault Information inthe INFORMATION Key section for a list of the triptypes). The message will remain on the display per-manently until removed by a keyboard operation. Ifthe DGP system restarts or is powered down and up,the trip indicator is remembered and redisplayed. Assoon as any key is pressed, the Trip message is re-moved and no longer remembered.

The Fail message has the format "FAIL xxx". Thefield following the word "FAIL" is a numeric codethat indicates the nature of the critical self-test fail-ure. The Fail message remains on the display until akey is pressed or until the DGP system restarts suc-cessfully (with no self-test failures). A list of the fail-ure numbers and their meanings can be found in theSERVICING section.

The Warning message has the format "WARN xxx".The field following the word "WARN" is a numeric

code that indicates the nature of the non-critical self-test failure. The Warning message remains on thedisplay until the a key is pressed or until the DGP sys-tem restarts successfully (with no self-test failures). Alist of the warning numbers and their meanings canbe found in the SERVICING section.

The Initialization message has the format"INITIALIZING" and is displayed while the DGP sys-tem is initializing itself during a power-up sequence.The display is blanked as soon as initialization iscomplete.

All other messages that are the result of keypad op-erations remain on the display until another key ispressed, or until no keys have been pressed for a pe-riod of 15 minutes; at the end of this time-out inter-val, the display is blanked. The time-out interval isset to 10 seconds when the END and ENT keys arepressed successively; at the end of this time-out inter-val, the display is blanked. Time-out also causes theMMI access privilege to be set at View Level.

TARGET LEDs

There are 18 LEDs that indicate all of the protectionfunctions that operated during a fault. The TargetLEDs display the information for the TRIP messagethat is currently on the display. See figures 3-2 and3-3 (DIT module) for details of the Target LEDs.

TARGET RESET KEY

The Target Reset Key is the CLR key on the keypad.Operation of the CLR key is explained in the sectionbelow.

KEYPAD

The MMI keypad is an interface method on the DGPsystem. The keypad is comprised of twenty keys. Seefigures 3-2 and 3-3 (MMI module) for details on thekaypad layout.

CLEAR Key (CLR)The CLR key is used to abort a keyboard sequence inprogress (for example, when the user sees he hasmade an error). When the CLR key is pressed, all orpart of the display will be blanked. If there is user-entered information on the display, only that infor-mation will be blanked. For example, if the user isentering a Setting value when the CLR key is pressed,only the user's input will be blanked; the name of the


8-3

setting will remain on the display. As another exam-ple, if the user is responding to an Action prompt,only the user's input will be blanked; the promptquestion will remain on the display. If there is nouser-entered information on the display, the entiredisplay will be blanked and the DGP system will ex-pect a Command key to be pressed.

If a Trip, Fail, or Warn message is being displayed,the user must press the CLR key to blank the errormessage (all other keys will be ignored). When theerror message is blanked, the last message will be dis-played, allowing the user to re-enter the correct re-sponse.

Fault data can be displayed by pressing the CLEARkey while a TRIP message is on display. Only targetinformation (TRIP messages) and the time of thetrips, for the accumulated faults are displayed. Press-ing CLEAR while the current TRIP message is dis-played shows its time of occurrence. Pressing CLEARagain shows the date. Pressing CLEAR again showstarget information for the previous fault. This con-tinues until the information is displayed for all of theaccumulated faults. At this point the display be-comes blank. TRIP messages for the recorded faultsare displayed in normal intensity and not blinking,in order to distinguish them from the latest TRIPmessage, which is blinking in high intensity. TheTarget LEDs display the protection functions thatoperated for the TRIP message that is currently onthe display.

Present Values Scrolling is activated by pressing theCLEAR key when the display is blank (items dis-played are described later under INF command keyprocessing). Each item is displayed for 4 secondsbefore proceeding to the next item. After scrollingthrough all of the items, the display is blanked.

Both the fault data display and the Present Valuedisplay are stopped by one of the following: TRIP ora key being pressed.

PRINT Key (PRT)NOTE:Printer output is not active in some models of DGPs(see the model selection guide).

For applicable DGP models, the PRT key is used todirect information to the printer instead of to thedisplay. When information is sent to the display,only one item at a time is displayed. When informa-tion is sent to the printer, all items within a category

(or, in the case of settings, all settings) are printed.When the PRT key is pressed, the characters "PRT"will appear in the display.ARROW Keys

The ARROW keys are used to scroll through the listof categories within a Command (SET, INF, ACT)key or to scroll through the list of items within acategory. For example, pressing the INF key will pro-duce the name of the first category (e.g., "STATUS")on the display. Pressing the UP-ARROW key willthen produce the name of the second category (e.g.,"FAULT") on the display. When the user reachesthe desired category, pressing the ENT key will thenproduce the first item of that category on the display.From that point on, pressing the UP-ARROW key willproduce each subsequent item in the category on thedisplay.

While the UP-ARROW key scrolls in a "forward" di-rection through a list of categories or items, theDOWN-ARROW key can be used to scroll "backward"through a list; i.e., the user may return to the previ-ously displayed item by pressing the DOWN-ARROWkey.

If the user is scrolling through items within a cate-gory and wants to get out of that category, pressingthe Command (SET, INF, ACT) key again will dis-play the current category name. The user may thenuse the ARROW keys to scroll through the categories.

ENTER Key (ENT)The ENT key is used to enter data or to enter achoice. The ENT key is also used in conjunctionwith the END key to confirm a setting change to bestored into the DGP’s non-volatile memory (see theEND Key description).

DATA ENTRY KEYSThe Data Entry keys consist of the numeric keys andthe decimal point. These keys are used to enter datainto the DGP system or to make choices in responseto prompts. The numeric keys [1/Y] and [3/N] havetwo meanings.

If the user is entering numeric values, the [1/Y] and[3/N] keys are processed and echoed as 1 and 3. Ifthe user is responding to a YES/NO prompt, the[1/Y] key is processed and echoed as a YES and the[3/N] key is processed and echoed as a NO.


8-4

END KeyThe END key causes two actions. First it is used toindicate that no more setting changes will be made.Second it is used to end a session. That is, when theuser presses the END key, the MMI becomes idle(without the 15 minute time-out) and remote com-munication actions and settings are enabled, if theywere previously locked by the MMI.

The key sequence for indicating the end of settingchanges and/or the end of a session is: END ENT

When the user presses the END key, the display shows"HIT ENT TO END". When the user presses theENT key, the display shows "ENDED".

1. If no setting values have been entered, the DGPsystem takes no action in response to theEND/ENT key sequence other than to enable ac-tion items locked previously by the MMI, to allowaction commands from remote communicationsto be executed.

2. If the Digital Output Test was activated from theMMI, pressing the END/ENT key sequence willdeactivate the test and turn protection on. Thiswill also set the MMI Privilege Level to View Level.

3. If settings have been changed, the END/ENT keysequence will cause the DGP system to reinitializeitself to use the new settings and the Event"SETTING CHANGE DONE" will be logged in theSequence of Events. The DGP system then checkswhether or not outputs have been disabled by theuser. If outputs have been disabled, the STATUSLED will remain red. If outputs are enabled, andthere are no critical self-test failures of the DGPsystem, the LED will turn green. The DGP protec-tion software reinitializes itself to use the new set-ting values. The displayed message changes to"ENDED". The MMI unlocks the settings lock toallow remote communication to display andchange settings from the DGP system.

The "ENDED" message is blanked from the dis-play when another key is pressed or after a 10 sec-ond delay. In the latter case, the display remainsblank until another key is pressed.

PASSWORDSThere are two sets of passwords, MMI and Commu-nications. Passwords are needed to perform certainoperations with the DGP system. A password for ac-tions or settings is entered by selecting the ENTER

PASSWD category under ACTION, and entering thepassword after the prompt (See the ACTIONS Keysection below). If an action or setting change is notperformed for a period of 15 minutes, the passwordbecomes inactive. For settings, after the key sequenceEND ENT is pressed, the password privileges becomeinactive. The settings and actions may be viewed atany time but may only be changed if the password forthat function is active. Refer to Enter Password inthe ACTIONS Key section.

There are two MMI passwords, one for Actions andone for Settings access at the keypad. These pass-words are limited to the numeric digits on the key-pad. The MMI passwords are different from thecommunications passwords, which are for logginginto the relay, remote settings changes, and perform-ing remote actions. The communication passwordscan contain any of the allowable alpha-numericcharacters in Table 8-2. All 5 types of password arelisted below:

MMI Passwords Factory DefaultActions 5678.Setting Changes 1234.

Communications Passwords Factory DefaultActions CTRL!Setting Changes SETT!Viewing information only VIEW!

NOTE:All factory default passwords MUST BE CHANGEDby the user before they can used effectively.

The communications passwords can only be viewedat the MMI using the Information key, and the MMIpasswords can only be viewed from the InformationMenu under Relay Functions in DGP-LINK. Allpasswords are displayed in encoded form. Use Table8-2 to decode the passwords.

SETTINGS Key (SET)The SET key is used to display or change settings.Settings are divided into categories. See Table 2-1for the full listing of all categories and settings avail-able in the DGP. Figure 8-1 shows the menu struc-ture of the SET key.

The user may scroll through all of the settings in acategory using the ARROW keys. If the user wishesto leave that category, pressing the SET key will causethe current category name to be displayed. Then theuser may go to another category by using an ARROW


8-5

key, or may enter a setting number, followed by theENT key, to go to another setting.

If the user wants to change a setting, he must firstdisplay that setting (item) as described above. Withthe present value of the setting displayed, he thenuses the Data Entry keys to enter the new value.When the first Data Entry key is pressed, the abbrevi-ated name remains on the display but the value isblanked and a blinking ":" symbol appears at the endof the name in place of the "=" symbol; each DataEntry key is displayed as it is pressed, in a lower thannormal intensity, and the ":" symbol continues toblink. Note that there are some settings that logicallyrepresent a state rather than a number (i.e.,YES/NO). For these settings, the [1/Y] and [3/N]keys are used to indicate the state ([1/Y] = YES and[3/N] = NO) and the words "YES" or "NO" are dis-played. After the last digit of the new value ispushed, the user presses the ENT key; at this pointthe blinking ":" symbol is replaced by an "=" symbol,the value is displayed at normal intensity, and theDGP system stores the new value as the value of thesetting. If the user presses any Command key, thePRT key, either ARROW key, or the CLR key, insteadof the ENT key, the new value will not be stored, andthe old value will be retained.

It is important to note that as soon as any value isentered for any setting, the DGP system will not stopits Protection activities. Settings are stored in a tem-porary buffer until the user presses END, ENT keysequence. This will cause a transfer of settings fromthe buffer to EEPROM, and re-initialization of pro-tection. If the END, ENT sequence is not performedand the DGP system is allowed to time out, all of thesettings in the temporary storage will be lost.

ACTIONS Key (ACT)The ACT key is used to perform actions. The cate-gories can be scrolled through, using the ARROWkeys. The 11 possible categories are listed below.The names of the categories displayed at the MMIare in parentheses. For convenience, each categoryhas also been assigned a number so that the user maygo directly to the desired category. The key sequencefor selecting an actions is: ACT n [ENT]

n=1: Disable Outputs (DISABLE)2: Enable Outputs (ENABLE)3: Trip (TRIP)4: Reset (RESET)5: Enter Date and Time (DATE/TIME)

6: Relay Test (RELAY TEST)7: MMI Test (MMI TEST)8: Fix Up Settings CRC (COMPUTE CRC)9: Enter Password (ENTER PASSWORD)10: Change Password (CHANGE PASSWORD)11: Digital Output Test (DIG OUTPUT TEST)

"n" is the optional category number; if omitted, cate-gory 1 is assumed. When the user presses the ENTkey following the displayed name of a category, thefirst item or prompt in that category is displayed. Ifthe category contains a list of items, the user mayscroll through the items using the ARROW keys, inthe same manner as described above for Settings.Figure 8-2 shows the menu structure of the ACT key.

1. Disable OutputsThis category is used to inhibit the DGP system fromenergizing any of the Digital Output channels. Thisonly includes the four Trip outputs, the four Alarmoutputs, and the VTFF output. After the ENT key ispressed, the display prompts the user with the mes-sage "DIS OUTPUTS?". The user presses the [3/N]key for NO or the [1/Y] key for YES and then pressesthe ENT key. If the user responds with a NO, themessage "CANCELLED" appears on the display, andno DGP action occurs. If the user responds with YES,the action is performed, the message "OUTPUTSDISABLED" appears on the display, the Status LEDturns red, and the event "LOCAL - DISABLEOUTPUTS" is logged in the sequence of events.

2. Enable OutputsThis category is used to permit the DGP system toenergize all of the Digital Output channels. Afterthe ENT key is pressed, the display prompts the userwith the message "EN OUTPUTS?". The user pressesthe [3/N] key for NO or the [1/Y] key for YES andthen presses the ENT key. If the user responds with aNO, the message "CANCELLED" appears on the dis-play, and no DGP action occurs. If the user respondswith a YES, the action is performed, the message"OUTPUTS ENABLED" appears on the display, theStatus LED turns green, and the event "LOCAL -ENABLE OUTPUTS" is logged in the sequence ofevents.

3. TripThis category is used to manually operate any one ofthe four trip output relays.

When the ENT key is pressed, the display promptsthe user with the message "WHICH RLY?". The user


8-6

enters the number of the desired Trip output andthen presses the ENT key. The number for eachTrip contact is shown in the following table:

Input # Trip Contact0 94G1 94G12 94G23 94G3

The display then prompts the user with the message"TRIP XXXX?" (XXXX is the name of the Trip Con-tact). The user presses the [3/N] for NO or the[1/Y] for YES and then presses the ENT key. If theuser responded with N, the message "CANCELLED"appears on the display, and no DGP action occurs. Ifthe user responded with Y, then the action is per-formed and the message "XXXX TRIPPED" appearson the display, and the event "LOCAL - MANUALTRIP" is logged in the sequence of events.

4. ResetThis category is used to clear out various pieces ofinformation stored in the DGP memory. The follow-ing information can be cleared.

FAULT REPORTSSEQUENCE OF EVENTS

When the ENT key is pressed, the display promptsthe user with the message "RST WHAT?". The userpresses a 0 for FAULT REPORTS or a 1 forSEQUENCE OF EVENTS to indicate which informa-tion is to be reset, and then presses the ENT key.The display then prompts the user with the message"RST FLT RPT?" or "RST SOE?". The user pressesthe [3/N] for NO or the [1/Y] for YES and thenpresses the ENT key. If the user responds with a NO,the message "CANCELLED" appears on the display,and no DGP action occurs. If the user responds witha YES, the action is performed and the message "FLTRPT RESET" or "SOE RESET" is displayed.

5. Date/TimeThis category is used to display or change the cur-rent date and/or time stored in the DGP system.When the ENT key is pressed, the display shows"DATE: mm/dd/yy". If the user wishes to changethe date, he enters 6 digits from the numeric keypad,then presses the ENT key. If the user presses any keyother than ENT, or the digits entered do not com-prise a valid date, the old date is retained (new dateis not stored) and an error message is displayed.

NOTE: After initial power up or loss of power exceed-ing 24 hours, the time and date will reset to00:00:00 01/01/90. All event and fault datawill be reset.

If the user presses the UP-ARROW key after viewingor changing the date, the display shows "TIME:hh:mm:ss". If the user wishes to change the time, heenters 6 digits, then presses the ENT key. If the userpresses any key other than ENT, or the digits entereddo not comprise a valid time, the old time is retained(new time is not stored) and an error message is dis-played.

6. Relay TestThis category is used to test the relay functions of theDGP system. After the ENT key is pressed, if the DGPsystem is already in Test Mode, the display will showthe current Test Mode selection. When not in TestMode the display will show the first item, "ENDTEST MODE" (refer to Figure 8-2 for the entire listof the selection). The user may then select a test orcancel a test by using the UP-ARROW and DOWN-ARROW keys followed by the ENT key. The test thatis being displayed is selected for execution by press-ing the ENT key. When the test is selected, the word"ON" will be displayed and the pickup of the selectedfunction will result in the output of the DOR12 con-tact output. The trip of the selected function willresult in the output of the DOR13 contact output.The user will be able to monitor only one function ata time. That is, if a user selects a function to moni-tor, any previously selected function will no longer bemonitored. Each test function may be selected byscrolling through the Menu, or entering the testnumber and pressing ENT.

To remove the DGP system from test mode, the usercan either press the ARROW keys until "END TESTMODE" is displayed, then press the ENT key, orpress the [1/Y] key followed by the ENT key twice;the currently selected function will stop being moni-tored.

7. MMI TestThis is used to test the display, keyboard, Status LED,target LEDs and printer. If the user presses the ENTkey, the entire left 8-character display is lit, enablingthe user to verify that all those display LED segmentsare working. The right 8-character display promptswith "NEXT?". If the user presses the [3/N] key fol-lowed by the ENT key, the next test (testing the right8-character display) is skipped. If the user presses


8-7

[1/Y] key followed by the ENT key, the right 8-character display is lit, enabling the user to verifythat all those display LED segments are working.

The left 8-character display prompts with "LEDTST?". If the user presses the [3/N] key followed bythe ENT key, the LED test is skipped. If the userpresses the [1/Y] key followed by the ENT key, theLED's will be tested. If the green LED is on, it will beextinguished and the red LED will be lit. If the redLED is lit, it will be extinguished and the green LEDwill be lit. The Target LED's will flash on/off 4times. Then each Target LED will be lit individually.When the test is over, the Target LED's will be re-turned to their original state.

The display then prompts with "KEYBRD TEST?". Ifthe user presses the [3/N] key followed by the ENTkey, the keyboard test is skipped. If the user pressesthe [1/Y] key followed by the ENT key, the keyboardtest is initiated. First the display is blanked and theuser is expected to press keys on the keyboard. Thekeys' mnemonics are echoed on the display, enablingthe user to verify that each key is being sensed cor-rectly. The CLR key terminates the keyboard test.

When the keyboard test is complete (or the user hasskipped the keyboard test), the display prompts with"PRINTER TEST?". If the user presses the [3/N] keyfollowed by the ENT key, the printer test is skippedand the MMI test is terminated. If the user pressedthe [1/Y] key followed by the ENT key, the printerwould be tested in the applicable DGP models. Pat-terns containing all printable characters (upper andlower case, and punctuation) would be printed in allpossible columns.

8. Fix Up Settings CRCThis category is used to recalculate the CRC (CyclicRedundancy Check) of the settings in non-volatilememory. This category may be used after the DGPsystem has reported an EEPROM failure, indicatingthat the stored settings do not match their CRCcode. When using this command, it is imperativethat the user EXAMINE EVERY SETTING IN THEDGP SYSTEM to assure that each setting is still cor-rect, before performing the END/ENT key sequenceto resume Protection (see SERVICING section).

After the ENT key is pressed, the display prompts theuser with the message "RECALC CRC?". If the userpresses the [3/N] key, the message "CANCELLED"appears on the display and no action is taken. If the

user presses the [1/Y] key, two checks are performed:privilege level must be Setting or Control level, andCommunication must not be in the process of chang-ing settings. If the checks fail, then an error messageis displayed and the action is not performed. If thechecks pass, then the setting's CRC code is recalcu-lated, the message "CHECK SETTINGS" appears onthe display, and the event "LOCAL - SETTINGSCHANGE DONE" is logged in the sequence of events.

Once the setting's CRC code has been calculated andEVERY DGP SETTING HAS BEEN EXAMINED,then the user must press the END key and the ENTkey to resume Protection.

9. Enter PasswordThis category is used to enter the MMI password thatactivates one of the two areas of input. The first areaof input allows the user to change settings (SettingsLevel). The second area of input allows the user toaccess control actions (Control Level). The privilegelevel reverts back to View Level when the MMI be-comes idle, either by using the END key or if theMMI is allowed to time out (15 min.). When theprivilege level is View, values can be viewed but nonecan be changed.

After the ENT key is pressed, the display prompts theuser with the message "ENTER PASSWORD". Theuser responds by pressing digit keys that representthe password. The digits are echoed with "*". Theuser then presses the ENT key, which displays"SELECTED" if the password was valid or"REQUEST INVALID" if it was not. MMI privilege isset to the level associated with the selected password.

10. Change PasswordThis category is used to change the password that iscurrently in effect. A password becomes effectivethrough selection of Enter Password in this category.

After the ENT key is pressed, the display prompts theuser with the message "NEW PASSWORD". The userpresses digit keys that represent the new password.The digits are echoed with "*". The user thenpresses the ENT key and he is prompted with themessage "REPEAT". The user must enter the newpassword again, then press the ENT key. If the twoentered passwords are exactly the same, then themessage "CHANGED" is displayed. If they are notthe same, then "NOT CHANGED" message is dis-played and the old password remains selected.


8-8

11. Digital Output TestThis category is used to test digital outputs of theDGP system.

After the ENT key is pressed, the display will showthe first item, "END TEST MODE", in the menu asshown in Figure 8-2. The user may then select a testfrom the menu by using the ARROW keys, followedby the ENT key.

Note: At this point the privilege level must be Controllevel. If the privilege level is wrong, then an errormessage is displayed and the test is not performed.

If outputs are enabled, then the user must indicate ifhe wants to disable protection. The message"DISABLE PROT?" is displayed. The user presses[1/Y] for YES or [3/N] for NO followed by ENTER.If the user indicated NO, then the messageCANCELLED is displayed and test selection isstopped. If user indicated YES, then the test namewill be redisplayed. The word "ON" will also beshown in the rightmost two characters of the displayand the test will be performed.

To stop the digital output test, and re-enable protec-tion, the user presses the ARROW keys until "ENDTEST MODE" is displayed, then press the ENT key.The user can also stop the test by pressing END ENTkey sequence, which ends the DGP session.

The available digital output tests are shown in Figure8-2.

INFORMATION Key (INF)The INF key is used to request information. The 8categories are listed below. The names displayed atthe MMI are in parentheses. The categories can bescrolled through, using the ARROW keys. For con-venience, however, each category is also assigned anumber so that the user may go directly to the cate-gory he wants.

The key sequence for requesting information is: INFn [ENT]

n = 1: Status Info (STATUS)2: Fault Info (FAULT)3: Present Values (VALUES)4: Events (EVENTS)5: Password (PASSWORD)6: Model (MODEL)7: Station Id (STATION ID)8: Generator Id (GENERATOR ID)

"n" is the optional category number; if omitted, cate-gory 1 is assumed. See Figure 8-3 for details of theINF key menu structure.

1. Request DGP StatusThis category is used to display the present status ofthe DGP system (see SERVICING section).

If the user presses the ENT key, the first item dis-played is the overall status of the DGP system. If theDGP system is working properly and protecting thegenerator, the display will be "STATUS: OK". Ifthere is a critical failure, the display will be"STATUS: FAIL". If there is a non-critical failure,the display will be "STATUS: WARN". If the DGPhardware is working properly, there may be miscella-neous status, displayed under the heading "STATUS:MISC". The above order is the order in which theoverall status will be displayed. For example, if thereis a critical alarm and a non-critical alarm the displaywill be "STATUS: FAIL", indicating the criticalalarm.

The user may use the arrow keys for further informa-tion if the status is a critical failure, a non-criticalfailure, or not protecting the generator.

2. Request Fault InformationThis category is used to display (or print in applica-ble models) information associated with any of thelast 3 faults that the DGP system has stored.

When the ENT key is pressed, the display will ask"FAULT #?". The user presses a digit (1 to 3), thenpresses the ENT key. (NOTE: 1 = most recent fault,2 = second most recent fault, etc.). If there is novalid fault information available for that fault, themessage "NO FAULT DATA" will be displayed. If theuser presses any number not between 1 and 3, an er-ror message is displayed.

The first item of the fault occurrence chosen is dis-played as "DATE: xx/xx/xx". Repeatedly pressingthe UP-ARROW key will invoke the following dis-plays:

DATE: xx/xx/xxTIME: xx:xx:xxOP TIME: xx (time in ms)FAULT TYPE: xxx (examples: ABC,AB,AC)TRIP TYPE: xxx (see list below)

A more complete fault report can be obtained by us-ing DGP-LINK. See the SOFTWARE section for de-tails.


8-9

NOTE: OP TIME is the time difference between anyprotection function pickup and any protec-tion function trip, as long as all protectionfunctions do not drop out simultaneously.The OP TIME counter will reset if all pro-tection functions are reset at the same time.

The abbreviations for the trip and trigger types are asfollows:

87G 40-2 24A 81-1O VTFF 27TN46A 32-1 24I 81-2O AE DI346T 51V 24T 81-1U 51GN DI440-1 64G1 59 81-2U 27

3. Request Present ValuesThis category is used to display the present analogvalues and the status of the contact inputs that theDGP system is monitoring.

If the user presses the ENT key, the first item is dis-played as "IAS = xxx.xx". Pressing the UP-ARROWkey will produce "ANGLE IAS = xxx.xx" on the dis-play, etc. Continuing to press the UP-ARROW keywill display each of the quantities shown in Figure 8-3 under the VALUES menu item.

The values are periodically updated while on display.

4. Request EventsThis category is used to print Sequence-of-Events in-formation in the applicable DGP models.

5. View PasswordThis category is used to view the remote communica-tion passwords in encrypted form.

If the user presses the ENTER key, a check is made toverify that Communication is not in the process ofchanging the passwords. If the check fails, then anerror message is displayed and the action is not per-formed. If the check passes, then the word VIEW isdisplayed. Pressing the UP ARROW key displays theView level password. Pressing the UP-ARROW re-peatedly displays the word SETTING, then the Set-ting level password; finally the word CONTROL, fol-lowed by the Control level password, and back to theword VIEW. All passwords are displayed in encryptedform.

6. Request DGP Model/VersionThis category is used to display the DGP modelnumber and the PROM version number.

If the user presses the ENT key, the model numberwill be displayed as "MD:DGPxxxxxxxxx". Pressingthe UP-ARROW key will display the PROM versionnumber as "VER:Vxxxxxxxxxx".

7. Station IdThis category is used to view the 32-character StationId string that was downloaded by the Remote Com-munication link. Station Id is included in all of theDGP system reports via DGP-LINK. See theSOFTWARE section for details.

If the user presses the ENTER key, the first 16 char-acters of the Station Id are displayed. Pressing theUP- or DOWN-ARROW displays the next 16 charac-ters of the Station Id.

8. Generator IdThis category is used to view the 32-character Gen-erator Id string that was downloaded by the RemoteComm. Generator Id is included in all of the DGPsystem reports via DGP-LINK. See the SOFTWAREsection for details.

If the user presses the ENTER key, the first 16 char-acters of the Generator Id are displayed. Pressing theUP- or DOWN-ARROW displays the next 16 charac-ters of the Generator Id.

ERROR MESSAGES

If the user enters a wrong response (either data or achoice), an error message will be displayed. See Ta-ble 8-1 for a list of the error messages.

If the setting's CRC code has become corrupted, cer-tain MMI functions will become unavailable. When-ever the error occurs, the user will not be able tochange any settings (although the settings can stillbe viewed). If the error occurs during startup, theuser will not be able to perform any of the Actioncommands except recalculate the CRC. Once thesetting's CRC has been recalculated by issuing theCOMPUTE CRC command, the user will be able toperform the Action commands and change settings.

The CRC code is a Cyclic Redundancy Check valuestored in memory that is automatically set up when-ever a setting is changed. This CRC code enables theEEPROM Self Test to verify the integrity of the set-tings area in EEPROM.


8-10

TABLE 8-1 MMI ERROR MESSAGES

ERROR MESSAGE CAUSE OF ERROR

VAL OUT OF RANGE Setting value either greater than upper limit or less than lower limit.

SETT NUM INVALID Setting number is not valid.

Y/N NOT ENTERED Setting value or response to a prompt had to be a YES or NO but a [1/Y]or [3/N] key was not entered.

REQUEST INVALID Any key that is invalid during a key sequence.

Some examples are:

CATEGORY INVALID A wrong category number was entered for either an action or informa-tion item.

DATE INVALID The day, month, and/or year are not valid.

TIME INVALID The hour, minute, and/or second are not valid.

FAULT # INVALID A fault number greater than the number of faults selected, or 0, was en-tered.

REMOTE LINK ACT The remote communications link is in use for actions or settings, localsettings changes and action cannot be performed.

MMI KEY ERROR MMI received an invalid key code from keyboard. (Hardware error)

ACT INVALID NOW The current action that the user is attempting to perform is invalid be-cause the setting's CRC code is in error.


8-11

TABLE 8-2 PASSWORD DECODER KEYENCRYPTED PASSWORD CONVERSION TABLE

MMI DECODED

(sp) P

! T

" X

$ Q

% U

& Y

( R

) V

* Z, S

- W

1 D

2 H

3 L

4 A

5 E

6 I

7 M

8 B

9 F

MMI DECODED

: J

; N

< C

= G

> K

? O

@ 0

A 4

B 8

D 1

E 5

F 9

H 2

I 6

L 3

M 7

P (sp)

FACTORY USE ONLY

MMI DECODED

Q $

R (

S ,

T !

U %

V )

W -

X "

Y &

Z *

[ .

\ #

] '

^ +

_ /

8-2 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONINTERFACE

HARDWARE JUMPERS

There are two factory-installed hardware jumpers inthe MMI module set to inhibit the ability to performthe Remote Manual Trip function, the RemoteChange Settings function, the Remote Disable Out-puts function, and the Remote Enable Outputs func-tion. These hardware jumpers must be removed ifthe above remote functions are to be allowed. (seeFigure 3-5 of the HARDWARE section)

MODEM CONNECTIONS ANDSETTINGS

When establishing communication between the DGPsystem and a remote PC, two modems connected viaa phone line are required; one modem is located atthe DGP system and the other modem is located atthe PC. The cable that connects the modem witheither the DGP system or the PC is shown in Figure 8-4B. Each of these modems must be "Hayes-compatible". This is necessary since the DGP-LINKcommunications software that runs on the PC sendsa Hayes-compatible command string to the modemlocated at the PC. The DGP system does not send


8-12

any configuration commands to its modem. Both,the DGP modem and the PC modem must beuniquely configured to permit the user to log intoand communicate with the DGP system using DGP-LINK software.

The required configuration settings are presented aschanges to the factory-default configuration settingsfor a Hayes SmartModem. These default settings are:

B1 &C0 S0=0 S37=0E1 &D0 S6=2 S38=20L2 &G0 S7=30M1 &J0 S8=2N1 &K3 S9=6P &L0 S10=14Q0 &P0 S11=95V1 &Q5 S12=50W0 &R0 S18=0X4 &S0 S25=5Y0 &T4 S26=1

&X0 S36=1

Other "Hayes-compatible" modems may implement asubset of the full Hayes command set. It is the re-sponsibility of the user to ascertain the exact com-mands accepted by a particular modem. The propersyntax for entering the Hayes-compatible commands(sometimes referred to as the "AT" command set) isnot described here. Refer to the manual of your mo-dem for an explanation of this syntax.PC Modem

The PC modem must be configured for "intelligent"operation (i.e., command recognition enabled).The default settings listed above are valid for DGP-LINK. Those configuration settings critical to theoperation of DGP-LINK are changed by DGP-LINK.The configuration commands sent to the modemfrom DGP-LINK are:

+++ (set modem to command mode)(delay 2 seconds)

ATE0L0Q0S7=60V0X4Y0 (see explanation be-low)

Command explanation:

AT Modem attention commandE0 Disable command state echoL0 Low speaker volumeQ0 Modem returns result codesV0 Result codes returned in numeric formX4 Enables features represented by result codes

Y0 Disable long space disconnectS7=60 Allows modem to hang up if connection is

not made within 60 sec.

If all of the above commands are not programmable,then the modem may not operate properly. In addi-tion to the required configuration settings listedabove, it is suggested that two other settings be madeby the user. These are:

&D3 Causes the modem to reset on the ON-to-OFFtransition of DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

&C1 Causes DCD (Data Carrier Detect) to track thereceived carrier signal

The modem will operate properly without makingthese two settings but the modem will not hang up ifthe appropriate handshaking signal is lost.

A DGP-LINK setting establishes the baud rate, whichmust match the baud-rate setting of the DGP system.DGP-LINK will then set the specified PC serial port(i.e., COM1, COM2) to the proper baud rate, parity,databits, and stopbits. If the PC modem is capable ofoperating at more than one baud rate, then it mustbe able to automatically configure its baud rate,character length, and parity setting by examiningthe "AT" command prefix.DGP Modem

The DGP modem must be configured for "dumb"operation (i.e., command recognition disabled).Since the DGP system does not send any configura-tion commands to its modem, the required configu-ration settings must be made prior to connecting themodem to the DGP system. Additionally, the mo-dem must be initialized to the required configura-tion settings each time modem power is turned OFFand then ON. Depending on the design of the mo-dem this is accomplished by making all the requiredsettings via switches or saving the settings in non-volatile memory.

The required configuration settings are:

E0 Disable command state echoL0 Low speaker volumeQ1 Disable result code display&C1 Causes DCD (Data Carrier Detect) to track the

received carrier signal&D3 Causes the modem to reset on the ON-to-OFF

transition of DTR (Data Terminal Ready)&Q0 Asynchronous modeS0=1 Enable auto-answer


8-13

If any of the above settings cannot be implemented,the modem may not answer, the DGP system may notconnect properly, or the user may not be able to loginto the DGP system.

With a Hayes SmartModem or equivalent, the DGPmodem will perform a modulation handshake withthe PC modem to set the baud rate of the DGP mo-dem. The default setting of "N1" permits handshak-ing to occur at any baud rate supported by both mo-dems. This is one reason why it is preferable to useidentical modems at each end.

Note that auto-answering is controlled with registerS0. S0=0 disables auto-answer. S0=1 will cause theDGP modem to answer the incoming call after onering. S0 can be set for any value between 1 and 255,for the Hayes modem assumed here, if it is desirableto delay modem answering. Note that DGP-LINK(version 1.05 or higher) configures the PC modemto wait 60 seconds for the DGP modem to answer. If

the DGP modem register S0 is set higher than 12, thePC modem may time out and hang up before theDGP modem can answer. S0=12 means that the DGPmodem will answer after twelve rings and corre-sponds approximately to the 60 second delay (S7=60)at the PC modem; however the user should verify thenumber of rings that correspond to 60 seconds for aparticular application.

NULL MODEM CONNECTIONS

A PC can be connected to a DGP system without theintervening modems and phone line by using a spe-cial cable called a "null modem" cable. The requiredpin-to-pin connections for this null modem cable areshown in Figure 8-4C. The pin-to-pin connectionsfor a null modem cable to connector COMM on theMMI are shown in Figure 8-4D. Neither null modemcable should exceed 50 feet in length.


8-14

Note: The above menu items require Setting password to make changes.

Figure 8-1 SETTING KEY MENU

CONFIG

SET(Settings)

87G

46A

46T

40

40-1

40-2

32-1

32-2

51V

64G1

64G2

24A

24T

59

81-1U81-2U81-3U81-4U

81-1O81-2O81-3O81-4O

DIG. INP.

VTFF

AE

51GN

27

UNIT IDSYS FREQSEL TVMSEL TCMPRI/SEC

CT RATIOVT RATIOCOMPORTPHASE SEQTIME SYNCNUM FLTSPRE FLTS ~OSC TRIG

NOM VOLTRATED-

CURRENTVT CONN

NCT RATIO


8-15

Note: The above menu items (except Time/Date) require an Action password to initiate the action. Resettingof the Time/Date requires a Setting password.

Figure 8-2 ACTION KEY MENU

DISABLE(Prot. Outputs)

ACT(Action)

ENABLE(Prot. Outputs)

TRIP(Manual)

RESET

DATE/TIME

RELAY TEST

MMI TEST

COMPUTE CRC

ENTER PASSWD

CHNG PASSWD

DIG OUT TEST

END TEST MODE87G

46A,T40-1,232-1,251V

64G1,2*24A,T

5981-1,2,3,4U*81-1,2,3,4O*

VTFFAE

51GN*27*

27TN*

END TEST MODE94G94G194G294G374A74B74C74D

74CR74NC74FF

TEST PICKUPTEST TRIP

* Functions available on some models only.See the Model Selection guide


8-16

NOTES:1. Currents, voltages, watts, and vars are either primary or secondary RMS values as selected by the user.2. Voltages are either phase-ground or phase-phase depending on VT connections of wye or delta respectively.3. Phase angles go from 0° to 180° (Lead) or -1° to -179° (Lag) referenced to either phase A or AB voltage depending

on VT connections of wye or delta respectively. The reference voltage must be present for this function to operate.4. I2 = (negative-sequence current / rated current) * 100.5. The third harmonic displayed is percent of the fundamental terminal voltage. However the DGP models with func-

tion 27TN displays the third harmonic in “volts”.6. Watts and Vars are automatically displayed with prefix K for kilo or M for mega as necessary.

Figure 8-3 INFORMATION KEY MENU

STATUS(Relay Self-test)

FAULT(3 Records)

VALUES(Metering)

EVENTS(100 Events)

PASSWORD(Remote Link)

MODEL

STATION ID

GENERATORID

INF(Information)

IAS, Angle IAS IBS, Angle IBSICS, Angle ICS

IAR, Angle IAR IBR, Angle IBRICR, Angle ICRI2(% Neg. Seq.)

VAN, Angle VANVBN, Angle VBNVCN, Angle VCNP, % 3rd HarmonicN, % 3rd Harmonic

WATTSVARS

GEN FREQSMPL FREQ

GEN ON/OFF LINEINLET VALVEDIG IN 3 & 4OSC TRIGDIG IN 6

VIEWSETTINGCONTROL

MODEL NUMBERFIRMWARE-VERSION No.


8-17

25 PIN D-TYPEMALE

23

5

7

TDRD

CTS

GND

TO RELAYPL-2

25 PIN D-TYPEMALE / FEMALE

23

7

20

TDRD

GND

DTR

TO PRINTER

A) PRINTER CONNECTIONS

25 PIN D-TYPEMALE

23456782022

TDRDRTSCTSDSRGNDDCDDTRRI


TO MODEM

B) REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS VIA MODEM CABLE

TO RELAYPL-1

23456782022

TDRDRTSCTSDSRGNDDCDDTRRI

25 PIN D-TYPEMALE

23458622207

TDRDRTSCTSDCDDSRRI

DTRGND


TO PC

C) REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS TO PC DIRECTLY

TO RELAYPL-1

23458622207

TDRDRTSCTSDCDDSRRI

DTRGND

9 PIN D-TYPEMALE

326947815

TDRDDSRRI

DTRRTSCTSDCDGND


TO PC

D) REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS FROM MMI MODULE TO PC

TO RELAYMMI MODULE

COMM

326947815

TDRD

DSRRI

DTRRTSCTSDCDGND

CABLES AVAILABLE UNDE4R GE PART NO. 0246A9866. SPECIFY CABLE TYPE AND CONNECTOR GENDER.

Figure 8-4 CABLE WIRING FOR DGP COMMUNICATIONS


9-1

Chapter 9 - DGP-LINK SOFTWARE

CHAPTER 9 - DGP-LINK SOFTWARE................................................................................................................................ 9-1

9-1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3

9-2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................................ 9-3Hardware............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-3Software.............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-3

9-3 INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................................................................. 9-3

9-4 GENERAL OPERATION................................................................................................................................................. 9-3Protection Jumpers.............................................................................................................................................................. 9-3Main Horizontal Menu Bar.................................................................................................................................................. 9-3Pull-Down Menus................................................................................................................................................................ 9-3Dialog Boxes....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3List Boxes............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-4Entering Text and Numbers ................................................................................................................................................. 9-4

9-5 PROGRAM OPERATION................................................................................................................................................ 9-4MAIN MENU ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4Relay functions.................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4Login................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5lOgout ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-5Change access level ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-5Hang up phone.................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5Actions... ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-6

change Password................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-6Manual trip ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-6Enable outputs .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-6Disable outputs ................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-6change Time and date.......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-6change station/Generator id................................................................................................................................................................. 9-6cAlculate CRC.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7Relay test mode................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7digital Output test ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7data reSet............................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-7

Information... ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7request Present values ......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7request fault report Identification......................................................................................................................................................... 9-8request Fault report ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-8request Events..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-8request Oscillography data.................................................................................................................................................................. 9-9request dgp Status ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-9request dgp Model............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-9request station/Generator id................................................................................................................................................................. 9-9request mmi pAssword......................................................................................................................................................................9-10

Settings... ..........................................................................................................................................................................9-10Upload dgp settings...........................................................................................................................................................................9-10Print dgp settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................9-10view/change Category of settings.......................................................................................................................................................9-10view/change Individual settings.........................................................................................................................................................9-10Download changed settings to dgp.....................................................................................................................................................9-11End setting changes...........................................................................................................................................................................9-11Save dgp settings to file.....................................................................................................................................................................9-11

Local functions..................................................................................................................................................................9-11


9-2

Settings... ...........................................................................................................................................................................9-11Load settings from file.......................................................................................................................................................................9-11Print local settings .............................................................................................................................................................................9-11view/change Category of local settings...............................................................................................................................................9-12view/change Individual local setting...................................................................................................................................................9-12Save local settings to file...................................................................................................................................................................9-12Model/version number.......................................................................................................................................................................9-12station/Generator ID..........................................................................................................................................................................9-12Download local settings to dgp...........................................................................................................................................................9-12End setting changes...........................................................................................................................................................................9-13

Graph oscillography data...................................................................................................................................................9-13go to DOS ..........................................................................................................................................................................9-13Setup..................................................................................................................................................................................9-13

Communication port number..............................................................................................................................................................9-13Dial type............................................................................................................................................................................................9-13Modem connection time.....................................................................................................................................................................9-13Relay parameters...............................................................................................................................................................................9-14Add relay to list.................................................................................................................................................................................9-14dElete relay from list.........................................................................................................................................................................9-14set path for DGP-DATA.....................................................................................................................................................................9-15memory available...............................................................................................................................................................................9-15Exiting DGP-LINK............................................................................................................................................................................9-15

Help ...................................................................................................................................................................................9-15

GEK-100666 Chapter 9 - DGP-LINK software

9-3

9-1 OVERVIEWDGP Link provides a convenience way of direct-linkor remote-link (via modem) interface to the relayusing a personal computer (PC). It also provides ac-cess to some settings in the relay that otherwise,could not be done on the MMI kaypad.

9-2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTSHardware

The minimum PC hardware requirements consists ofthe following components. An IBM PC or compati-ble with at least one serial port, a minimum of 500Kbytes of free memory (RAM) to run the program in,and one of the printers described below for printingreports.

Software

Requires DOS 3.1 or above for the PC operating sys-tem.

9-3 INSTALLATIONInsert DGP-LINK diskette into drive A. At the A:>\prompt, type INSTALL followed by an ENTER. Torun the software, type DGP-LINK followed by anENTER.

9-4 GENERAL OPERATIONProtection Jumpers

In order to have complete remote control of the unit,the factory-installed jumpers, J1 and J2 of the MMImodule must be removed. Installing J1 disables re-mote closing of all of the output relays. Installing J2will disable all remote setting changes and the dis-able/enable of outputs (see Figure 3-5 in theHARDWARE section).

Main Horizontal Menu Bar

Items in the main horizontal menu are selected inone of three ways:

1. Position the mouse cursor on top of the menuitem and click the left button.

2. Use a hot key. The hot key is the combination ofthe ALT key and the letter that is highlighted inthe item description (blue).

3. Once either of the above methods has been usedto select an item on the menu, indicated by oneitem being highlighted, the RIGHT and LEFTARROW keys can be used to go to adjacent menuitems. If the menu is not visible just below thehighlighted item on the menu bar, use the DOWNARROW key to display the menu.

Pull-Down Menus

Pull-down menu items are selected in a number ofways:Mouse

Position the mouse cursor on top of the menu item,then click on the left mouse button to display thepull-down menu. If the user wishes to select an itemin the pull-down menu, position the mouse over thedesired item and click on the left mouse button.

Both may be done at once by positioning the cursorover the menu item on the menu bar and holdingthe left mouse button down, moving the mouse cur-sor to the desired entry, and then releasing themouse button.Keyboard

Activating the "hot key" is the combination of hold-ing the ALT key and striking the highlighted key.Using a hot key will activate the associated menu ordialog box. If there is no hot key for a desired menuitem, use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to high-light the desired item, then press the ENTER key.Pressing the ENTER key will activate the associatedmenu or dialog box.

Dialog Boxes

Dialog boxes are generally characterized by a titlebar, a grey box, and OK and CANCEL buttons. Thedialog box cannot be moved, resized, or iconized. Inaddition, when a dialog box is displayed, the usercan only access items in the dialog box, not any otheritems on the screen.

If an item in the dialog box has a title with a high-lighted character (blue in the default color scheme),the user can access this item from the keyboard byusing the ALT key with the highlighted character(the hot key). Items in a dialog box can also be ac-


9-4

cessed from the keyboard by using the cursor keys:UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT ARROW keys, PAGEUP/DOWN keys and the TAB/SHIFT TAB keys. Inany dialog box the TAB key will move sequentially inone direction, or the SHIFT TAB key in the oppositedirection, selecting items in the dialog box with eachkeystroke. The other cursor keys will generally movewithin a selected item.

Buttons in the dialog box can be selected from thekeyboard by using the UP/DOWN ARROW keys, theTAB/SHIFT TAB keys, or, if the button has a high-lighted character, the hot key.

To exit from the dialog box and clear it from thescreen, the user selects either the OK button or theCANCEL button. The mouse can be used to selectthese buttons by moving the mouse cursor over thebutton and clicking the left mouse button. In addi-tion, the keyboard can be used to select these buttonsby using their hot keys. The hot key for the OK but-ton is ALT-O and the hot key for the CANCEL but-ton is ALT-C.

The mouse can be used to select any item in a dialogbox by pointing it at the desired item and clicking onit with the left button.

The OK button accepts the selection(s) made by theuser. The CANCEL button cancels the present selec-tion. Any highlighted button can be selected bystriking the ENTER key.

List Boxes

A list box is another box within a dialog box that listsall choices for an item in the dialog box (for exam-ple, a list of file names). If the list of available entriesis longer than the displayed list box, the list box has avertical scroll bar that allows the user to scrollthrough the list.

The following table lists the valid keys and theirfunctions for list boxes:

UP ARROW Move up one selection.DOWN ARROW Move down one selection.PAGE UP Move up one page of selections.PAGE DOWN Move down one page of selections.HOME Move to the first selection.END Move to the last selection.RETURN Accept the current selection and

exit the list box.ALT-X Exit the list box without making a

selection.

Entering Text and Numbers

The following keys are used when entering and edit-ing text and numbers.

LEFT ARROW Move the cursor one character tothe left.

RIGHT ARROW Move the cursor one character tothe right.

DELETE Delete the character at the cursor.BACKSPACE Delete the character to the left of

the cursor.INSERT Toggle between the insert and

overwrite mode.Overwrite mode is indicated by anunderscore-character cursor.Insert mode is indicated by ablock-character cursor.

ENTER Accept the text or number in thefield/box

ESCAPE Clear the text or number in thefield/box.

9-5 PROGRAM OPERATIONMAIN MENU

The main horizontal menu has the following itemsand hot keys.

Relay Functions ALT-RLocal Functions ALT-LSetup ALT-SHelp ALT-H

Each item in the main horizontal menu has a pull-down menu associated with it.

Relay functions

Relay functions has the following menu items andassociated hot keys:

Login ALT-LlOgout ALT-OChange access level ALT-CHang up phone ALT-HActions... ALT-AInformation... ALT-ISettings... ALT-S


9-5

Login

Login is used to gain access to the relay. When log-ging into a DGP system for the first time, the usermust use the factory password. When a user is loggedin under the factory password, the only commandsthat can be used at the PC are those to change thepassword and to log out. The factory password ischanged to the user's password by selecting thechange Password menu item from the Actions menuitem from the Relay functions pull-down menu. Thecurrent password is the factory password and the newpassword is the user's password. The encoded Com-munications password can only be viewed locally, onthe MMI.

The Login dialog box contains a list of the currentlyconfigured DGP systems, a place to enter the pass-word, a place to enter the unit ID, a button for add-ing a new DGP system to the configured DGP list, anOK button and a CANCEL button.

The list of currently configured DGP systems con-tains the unit description, phone number, baud rate,and multiplexor switch code for each DGP system.

The NEW RELAY button in the dialog box allows theuser to add a relay that has not been previously en-tered into the list of configured relays. The user en-ters the unit description, the phone number, themultiplexor switch code, and the baud rate for thenew relay. The new relay is added to the list of con-figured relays.

Once a relay is selected from the list of relays, theuser is asked for the password and the unit ID. Oncethis information is entered, the user selects the OKbutton to log in to the relay. Any of the three pass-words for Communications can be used to log in tothe relay. (See PASSWORDS in the INTERFACEsection.) The password used will determine the ac-cess level when the login procedure is complete. Forexample, if settings changes will be performed, thenthe password could be the Settings access password.Another method of logging in would be to use theView access password to log into the DGP system, andchange the access level when settings changes areneeded. See Change access level below for more in-formation.

Note: If an incorrect password is entered on threeconsecutive tries using DGP-LINK, the MMI willshow: "WARN 60" and the 74NC relay will oper-ate. To remove this condition, the user mustlog in and log out correctly, using DGP-LINK.

lOgout

Logout disables access to the relay. A check is madeto determine the status of protection at the DGP sys-tem (ON or OFF). The status is displayed in the dia-log box. Selecting the OK button logs out of the re-lay. Selecting the CANCEL button leaves the userlogged in to the relay. If the status of protection isOFF due to a setting change that was not ended, pickthe CANCEL button and choose End settings changein Settings in the Relay Functions menu.

Change access level

Change access level allows the user to enter anotherpassword so that the settings can be changed or ac-tions can be performed.

To choose Change access level, move the mouse cur-sor to the item and click on it with the left mousebutton or use the hot key ALT-C. A dialog box willappear, with space to enter a password. Once thelevel has been changed, the new level will be dis-played at the bottom of the screen. The followingtable contains operations performed by DGP-LINKand the associated password level required to per-form the operation. All settings can be viewed at anylevel, but only changed with the Settings access leveldisplayed.

DGP-LINK Operation Required Access Level

Change Password Any LevelManual Trip Actions LevelEnable Outputs Actions LevelDisable Outputs Actions LevelChange Time and Date Settings LevelChange Station/ Generator Id Settings LevelCalculate CRC Any LevelRelay Test Actions LevelDigital Output Test Actions levelSettings Changes Settings LevelData Reset Actions Level

Hang up phone

This selection will disconnect the phone line at themodem. If the user is logged in to the relay, the lo-gout procedure will be completed before hanging upthe phone. To pick this selection, use the hot keyALT-H or click on the menu item with the left mousebutton.


9-6

Actions...

change Password ALT-PManual trip ALT-MEnable outputs ALT-EDisable outputs ALT-Dchange Time and date ALT-Tchange station/Generator id ALT-GcAlculate CRC ALT-ARelay test mode ALT-Rdigital Output test ALT-Odata reSet ALT-S

change PasswordThis item allows the user to change the password inthe DGP system. The valid password characters are Ato Z, 0 to 9, and space. The factory password con-tains one or more characters that are not valid. TheCommunications password can only be viewed on theMMI, in encrypted form, therefore it isIMPORTANT that the user keep a record of thepassword in a safe place.

First, the user must enter the present password. Ifthe entered password is valid, the user must then en-ter the new password. If the new password is valid,the user must enter the identical new passwordagain. The user selects the OK button; this does notyet cause the password to be changed. Next, the useris asked to confirm the change. If the user selects theOK button, the password is changed.

Manual tripThis item allows the user to operate the output relaysmanually. Each of the four output relays (94G-94G3) being controlled by the DGP system can beoperated individually. Note that the relays cannot beoperated if the appropriate jumper is installed (seeFigure 3-5 in the HARDWARE section for the loca-tion and description of the jumpers). To selectManual trip, use the hot key ALT-(M) or click on themenu item with the left mouse button.

The user selects the output relay to trip by using theUP and DOWN ARROW keys or clicking on the se-lection with the left mouse button. When the userselects the OK button and an output relay is selected,the user is asked to confirm the action. If the userselects the OK button, the relay is operated and theuser is returned to the previous screen.

Enable outputsThis item allows the user to permit the DGP systemto energize the relay outputs. Note that the digitaloutputs cannot be enabled remotely if the appropri-ate jumper is installed (see Figure 3-5 in theHARDWARE section for the location and descrip-tion of the jumpers on the MMI module). This itemis selected by using the ALT-E hot key or clicking onthe menu item with the left mouse button.

If the user selects the OK button, another dialog boxis displayed to confirm the action. If the user selectsthe OK button again, the outputs are enabled.

Disable outputsThis item allows the user to inhibit the DGP systemfrom energizing any of the relay outputs except forthe Critical Alarm output, the Non-critical Alarmoutput, the Test Pickup output, and the Test Tripoutput. Note that the digital outputs cannot be dis-abled if the appropriate jumper is installed (see Fig-ure 3-5 of the HARDWARE section for the locationand description of the jumpers). This item is se-lected by using the ALT-D hot key or clicking on themenu item with the left mouse button.

If the user selects the OK button, another dialog boxis displayed to confirm the action. If the user selectsthe OK button again, the outputs are disabled.

change Time and dateThis item allows the user to set the time and date inthe DGP system to the current time and date.Changing the time and date through this menu doesnot affect the time and date in the PC.

First the DGP system's current time and date is dis-played. The time is displayed in the 24-hour formatHH:MM:SS. The date is displayed in the formatMM/DD/YY. The user may then edit the time anddate.

When the user selects the OK button, the user isasked to confirm the action. If the user selects theOK button again, the time and date are changed inthe DGP system.

change station/Generator idThis dialog box displays the station and generator IDfor the relay to which the user is logged in. The IDscan be up to 32 characters long and must be allprintable characters. To change an ID, select thedesired ID with the TAB key or click on it with theleft mouse button. Once the correct ID has been se-


9-7

lected, use the insert, delete and backspace keys toedit and enter data. After the correct data has beenentered, select the OK button by clicking on it withthe left mouse button or using the ALT-O hot key.The user will be asked to confirm the IDs beforesending them to the DGP system. Selecting the OKbutton again will send the IDs to the DGP system.

cAlculate CRCThis item allows the user to recalculate the settingsCRC code in non-volatile RAM. cAlculate CRC isselected by using the ALT-A hot key or clicking onthe menu item with the left mouse button. OncecAlculate CRC has been chosen, a dialog box will bedisplayed. The dialog box contains only the OK andCANCEL buttons.

If the OK button is selected, the user is asked to con-firm the action with another dialog box. If the userselects the OK button again, the settings CRC code isrecalculated and all the settings are sent back to thePC. In addition, a message is displayed telling theuser to verify all settings.

Relay test modeThis item allows the user to test the relay functions ofthe DGP system. Relay test mode is selected with theALT-R hot key or by placing the mouse cursor overthe menu item and clicking on the left mouse but-ton. Once Relay test mode has been selected, the testfunctions are displayed in a list box. To find the de-sired test, use the PAGE UP/DOWN and UP/DOWNARROW keys or use the mouse on the scroll bar.

The user selects the desired test function to performby clicking on it with the left mouse button, or hit-ting the ENTER key once the correct test has beenhighlighted. If the user selects the OK button, an-other dialog box will be displayed to confirm the test.If the user again selects the OK button, the relay en-ters the selected test mode.

To put the relay back in operating mode, select the"End test mode" from the list of tests.

digital Output testThis item allows the user to perform digital outputtests in the relay. The tests are displayed in a list box.

The user selects the test to perform. When the userselects the OK button, the user is asked to confirmthe test. If the user again selects the OK button, thetest is performed. This will put the relay in test

mode. To put the relay back in operating mode, theuser executes "End test mode".

data reSetThis item allows the user to reset various data itemscontained in the relay. The data items are displayedin a list box.

The user selects the data item to reset by using theUP/DOWN ARROW keys or clicking on the data re-Set selection with the left mouse button.

When the user selects the OK button after a dataitem has been selected, the user is asked to confirmthe action. If the user selects the OK button, the se-lected data reSet item is cleared from the relay andthe user is returned to the previous screen.

Information...

request Present values ALT-Prequest fault report Identification ALT-Irequest Fault report ALT-Frequest Events ALT-Erequest Oscillography data ALT-Orequest dgp Status ALT-Srequest dgp Model ALT-Mrequest station/Generator id ALT-Grequest MMI pAssword ALT-A

request Present valuesThis item allows the user to display, print and/or filethe present values. To select this menu item, eitherclick on it with the left mouse button or use the ALT-P hot key. Once this item is selected, a dialog boxwill appear with three independent choices for dis-playing, printing and filing the present values. Tochange any of the three choices, either click on itwith the left mouse button or use the TAB key tohighlight the selection and then the space bar tochange it. An X in the brackets indicates that choicehas been selected and no X indicates that choice hasnot been selected.

If the user chooses to save the report in a file, a filename must be entered in the box supplied. To enterthe file name, either move the mouse cursor to thebox and click on the left mouse button, or use theTAB key to highlight the box. Once the box hasbeen selected, enter the filename followed by theENTER key.


9-8

After all the choices have been made, click on theOK button, or use the ALT-O hot key, to retrieve thereport from the relay.

If the report is displayed, either click on the smallbox in the upper left corner with the left mouse but-ton when finished, or use the ALT-F4 hot key. Oncethe present values have been cleared from the screen,the Present values dialog box will be redisplayed.Choose the CANCEL button to exit Present values.

request fault report IdentificationThis item allows the user to display and/or print theidentification of each fault report, which includesthe time, date, and trip type for each fault. This in-formation allows the user to determine easily whichfault to examine.

To select this menu item, either click on it with theleft mouse button or use the ALT-I hot key. Oncethis item is selected, a dialog box will appear withthree independent choices for displaying, printingand filing the present values. To change any of thethree choices, either click on it with the left mousebutton, or use the TAB key to highlight the selectionand the space bar to change it. An X in the bracketsindicates that choice has been selected and no X in-dicates that choice has not been selected.


After all the choices have been made, click on theOK button or use the ALT-O hot key to retrieve theidentifications from the relay. If the identificationshave been displayed, either click on the small box inthe upper left corner with the left mouse buttonwhen finished, or use the ALT-F4 hot key. Once theidentifications have been cleared from the screen,the fault report Identification dialog box will be re-displayed. Use the ALT-C hot key or click on theCANCEL button to exit.

request Fault reportThis item allows the user to display, print and/or filea fault report and its associated events. To select thismenu item, either click on it with the left mouse but-ton or use the ALT-F hot key. Once this item is se-lected, a dialog box will appear with three independ-

ent choices for displaying, printing and filing thepresent values. To change any of the three choices,either click on it with the left mouse button or usethe TAB key to highlight one of the selections andthe UP/DOWN ARROW keys to choose one of thethree choices. An X in the brackets indicates thatchoice has been selected and no X indicates thatchoice has not been selected. Use the space bar tochange any of the choices. The user must enter thefault report number (from 1 to 3) in the box sup-plied on the first line of the Fault report dialog box.


After all the choices have been made, click on the OKbutton or use the ALT-O hot key to retrieve the faultreport from the relay. To clear the fault report fromthe screen, if it has been displayed, either click on thesmall box in the upper left corner with the left mousebutton, or use the ALT-F4 hot key. Once the faultreport has been cleared from the screen, the Faultreport dialog box will be redisplayed. Use the ALT-Chot key or click on the CANCEL button to exit.

request EventsThis item allows the user to display, print and/or filethe events stored in the relay. To select this menuitem, either click on it with the left mouse button oruse the ALT-E hot key. Once this item is selected, adialog box will appear with three independentchoices for displaying, printing and filing the pres-ent values. To change any of the three choices, ei-ther click on it with the left mouse button or use theTAB key to highlight one of the selections and theUP/DOWN ARROW keys to choose one of the threechoices. An X in the brackets indicates that choicehas been selected and no X indicates that choice hasnot been selected. Use the space bar to change anyof the choices.

If the user chooses to save the report in a file, a filename must be entered in the box supplied. To enterthe file name, either move the mouse cursor to thebox and click on the left mouse button or use theTAB key to highlight the box. Once the box hasbeen selected, enter the filename followed by theENTER key.


9-9

After all the choices have been made, click on theOK button or use the ALT-O hot key to retrieve theevents from the relay. The events are displayedchronologically, starting with the most recent event.There may be more events than can be displayed onone screen. If there are more events to see, a scrollbar will appear on the left side of the box. Use thePAGE UP/DOWN keys or use the mouse on the scrollbar to see the other events. To clear the events fromthe screen, if they have been displayed, either clickon the small box in the upper left corner with the leftmouse button, or use the ALT-F4 hot key. Once theevents have been cleared from the screen the Eventsdialog box will be redisplayed. Use the ALT-C hotkey or click on the CANCEL button to exit.

NOTE: If DC power is removed for more than 24hours, all event information may be lost.

request Oscillography dataFor applicable DGP models, this item allows the userto save on disk the oscillography data for a particularfault.

request dgp StatusThis item allows the user to display, print and/or filethe DGP status. To select this menu item, eitherclick on it with the left mouse button or use the ALT-S hot key. Once this item is selected, a dialog boxwill appear with three independent choices for dis-playing, printing and filing the present values. Tochange any of the three choices, either click on itwith the left mouse button or use the TAB key tohighlight one of the selections and the UP/DOWNARROW keys to choose one of the three choices. AnX in the brackets indicates that choice has been se-lected and no X indicates that choice has not beenselected. Use the space bar to change any of thechoices.


After all the choices have been made, click on theOK button or use the ALT-O hot key to retrieve thestatus from the relay. To clear the status from thescreen, if it has been displayed, either click on thesmall box in the upper left corner with the left mouse

button, or use the ALT-F4 hot key. Once the statushas been cleared from the screen, the Status dialogbox will be redisplayed. Use the ALT-C hot key orclick on the CANCEL button to exit.

request dgp ModelThis item allows the user to display, print and/or filethe DGP model and PROM version number. To se-lect this menu item, either click on it with the leftmouse button or use the ALT-S hot key. Once thisitem is selected, a dialog box will appear with threeindependent choices for displaying, printing andfiling the present values. To change any of the threechoices, either click on it with the left mouse buttonor use the TAB key to highlight one of the selectionsand the UP/DOWN ARROW keys to choose one ofthe three choices. An X in the brackets indicatesthat choice has been selected and no X indicates thatchoice has not been selected. Use the space bar tochange any of the choices.


After all the choices have been made, click on theOK button or use the ALT-O hot key to retrieve themodel and PROM version from the relay. To clearthe model and version from the screen, if they havebeen displayed, either click on the small box in theupper left corner with the left mouse button, or usethe ALT-F4 hot key. Once the model and versionhave been cleared from the screen, the Model dialogbox will be redisplayed. Use the ALT-C hot key orclick on the CANCEL button to exit.

request station/Generator idTo select this menu item, either click on it with theleft mouse button or use the ALT-G hot key. Thisdialog box displays the station and generator ID ofthe relay from which information is being uploadedfrom the relay with the settings. Both the station IDand generator ID can only be viewed with this item.To change the station ID and generator ID selectChange station/generator id from the Actions menu.When finished viewing the IDs, click on the OK but-ton or use the ALT-O hot key.


9-10

request mmi pAsswordTo select this menu item, either click on it with theleft mouse button or use the ALT-A hot key. Thedialog box displays the MMI passwords in encryptedform. These passwords are the ones to be used at theMMI. These are not the Communications passwordused with DGP-LINK. The MMI passwords can onlybe viewed from this item. The MMI passwords canonly be changed at the MMI keypad. For more in-formation see the INTERFACE section. When fin-ished viewing the passwords, click on the OK buttonwith the left mouse button or use the hot key ALT-O.

Settings...

The Relay functions Settings menu has the followingitems and hot keys:

Upload dgp settings ALT-UPrint dgp settings ALT-Pview/change Category of settings ALT-Cview/change Individual settings ALT-IDownload changed settings to dgp system ALT-DEnd settings change ALT-ESave settings to file ALT-S

Upload dgp settingsThis menu item uploads the settings from the DGPsystem. To select this menu item, use the ALT-U hotkey or click on the menu item with the left mousebutton.

Print dgp settingsThis item allows the user to print all settings or a spe-cific category of settings. First a list box is displayedwith the category names, plus one additional itemfor printing all categories. If the desired selection isnot visible, use PAGE UP/DOWN or the UP/DOWNARROW keys to see the other entries. To select anentry, either click on it with the left mouse button, orhighlight the item with the cursor control keys andhit ENTER. After a category has been picked, select-ing the OK button will print the settings.

view/change Category of settingsThis item allows the user to change or view one or allof the settings in a category. To select this menuitem, use the ALT-C hot key or click on the menuitem with the left mouse button. Once the menuitem has been selected, a list box of category names isdisplayed. The user must select a category to view orchange, with the left mouse button or the UP andDOWN ARROW keys followed by the ENTER key.

Once a category has been chosen, selecting the OKbutton will display a dialog box with the settings inthe category.

The dialog box for the category consists of a list boxcontaining the settings, the usual OK and CANCELbuttons, a box for a setting number to be entered,and a box for the setting value to be changed. TheTAB key will select any of the above items in the listbox. The arrow keys and PAGE UP/DOWN keys willmove the contents to display the unseen settings. Asetting can be chosen to be changed by highlightingit with the cursor keys and then hitting the ENTERkey, or clicking on it with the left mouse button. Af-ter the setting has been selected, it can be changed inthe box marked setting value.

After all the settings changes have been completed,selecting the OK button will save the settings changesand return to the Settings menu.

view/change Individual settingsThis item allows the user to change or view one set-ting at a time. To select this item, either click on itwith the left mouse button or use the ALT-I hot key.Once this item has been selected, a dialog box is dis-played containing a field to enter a setting number, alist box containing all the settings for the DGP sys-tem, a field to enter a new setting value for a selectedsetting, and an informational field with the validrange for the setting value. Each of the differentitems can be selected by using the TAB key, or byclicking on them with the left mouse button.

The field labeled "Enter setting number" allows theuser to select a setting to change. Use the editingkeys to enter and/or change the contents of the field.When a setting number has been entered, followedby the ENTER key, the list box scrolls to the settingand places the cursor in the setting value box so thesetting may be changed. Hit ENTER after enteringany setting value.

The field labeled "Enter setting value" is used to en-ter a new value for the selected setting. The value ischecked to make sure it is in the allowed range. Theallowed range is specified in the field labeled"Setting range". When a setting valued is changed,the word "Changed" is displayed in the list box nextto the setting. The user selects the OK button to savethe setting changes.


9-11

Download changed settings to dgpThis item allows the user to transmit all the changedsettings to the DGP system. Note that if the appro-priate jumper is installed, the DGP system will notallow setting changes from the PC. See Figure 3-5 ofthe HARDWARE section for more information onthe jumpers.

Selecting Download with the ALT-D hot key or click-ing on it with the left mouse button will display a dia-log box with the changed settings. There is an op-tion to end the settings change automatically. Topick this option, either place the mouse cursor overthe box and click on the left mouse button or use theTAB key to highlight the selection and use theSPACE BAR to select it.

Note:If the access level is not Settings, the option to Down-load changed settings to the dgp will not be available.

End setting changesThis item is selected after downloading settings totell the DGP system that settings changes are com-plete and protection should use the new settings. (Ifthe option to 'end settings changes automatically' waspicked when downloading settings to the DGP sys-tem, then this menu item does not need to be se-lected again.) To select this menu item, use theALT-E hot key or click on it with the left mouse but-ton. Once the item is selected, a dialog box that onlycontains the OK and CANCEL buttons is displayed.To end the settings changes, select the OK buttonwith the ALT-O hot key or by clicking on it. If theOK button is selected, another dialog box will appearto confirm the choice to end the settings changes. Ifthe user selects the OK button, the setting changesare ended.

Save dgp settings to fileThis item allows the user to write the settings to adisk file. To select this item, use the ALT-S hot keyor click on the menu item with the left mouse but-ton. The user enters a file name (it may include apath also) in the field labeled "Enter file name".The user selects the OK button to save the settings inthe specified file.

The contents of the settings file saved with this menuitem are raw numbers; there is no description of thecontents in the file because it is used for input to theprogram (DGP-LINK). Use Print dgp settings in the

Local functions Settings menu if a description of thesettings is desired.

Local functions

The Local functions menu has the following itemsand hot keys.

Settings... ALT-SGraph oscillography data ALT-Ggo to DOS ALT-D

Settings...

The Local functions Settings... menu has the follow-ing items and hot keys.

Load settings from file ALT-LPrint local settings ALT-Pview/change Category of local settings ALT-Cview/change Individual local setting ALT-ISave local settings to file ALT-SModel/version number ALT-Mstation/Generator id ALT-GDownload local settings to dgp system ALT-DEnd setting changes ALT-E

Load settings from fileThis item allows the user to read settings from a diskfile into the program (DGP-LINK) as local settings.To select this item, either click on it with the leftmouse button or use the ALT-L hot key. This per-mits the user to load and work on another set of set-tings, other than the set that was initially loadedfrom the relay.

Once this item has been selected, a dialog box is dis-played containing several fields, including a list offiles in the current directory and a list of disk drivesand subdirectories.

The list box labeled "Files" contains a list of files inthe current directory from which the user can selecta file. The list box labeled "Directories" contains alist of subdirectories and drives where the user can gofor additional lists of files.

The user selects the OK button to read into DGP-LINK the local settings from the selected file.

Print local settingsThis item allows the user to print all settings or cate-gories of settings. To select this item, use the ALT-Phot key or click on it with the left mouse button.Once this item has been selected, a list box is dis-


9-12

played with the category names, plus one additionalitem for printing all categories.

The user selects the desired category of settings toprint. The highlighted item in the list box is the onethat is selected. The user selects the OK button toprint the settings.

view/change Category of local settingsThis item allows the user to change or view one or allof the settings in a category. To select this menuitem, use the ALT-C hot key or click on the menuitem with the left mouse button. Once the menuitem has been selected, a list box of category names isdisplayed. The user must select a category to view orchange with the left mouse button, or the UP andDOWN ARROW keys followed by the ENTER key.Once a category has been chosen, selecting the OKbutton will display a dialog box with the settings inthe category.

The dialog box for the category consists of a list boxcontaining the settings, the usual OK and CANCELbuttons, a box for a setting number to be entered anda box for the setting value to be changed. The TABkey will select any of the above items in the list box.A setting can be chosen to be changed, by highlight-ing it with the cursor keys and then hitting theENTER key, or clicking on it with the left mouse but-ton. After the setting has been selected, it can bechanged in the box marked "Setting Value".

After all the settings changes have been completed,selecting the OK button will save the settings changesand return to the Settings menu.

view/change Individual local settingThis item allows the user to change or view one set-ting at a time. To select this item, either click on itwith the left mouse button or use the ALT-I hot key.Once this item has been selected, a dialog box is dis-played containing a field to enter a setting number, alist box containing all the settings for the DGP systemfrom a saved-settings file, a field to enter a new set-ting value for a selected setting, and an informa-tional field with the valid range for the setting value.Each of the different items can be selected by usingthe TAB key or clicking on it with the left mouse but-ton.

The field labeled "Enter setting number" allows theuser to select a setting to change. Use the editingkeys to enter and/or change the contents of the field.When a setting number has been entered, followed

by the ENTER key, the list box scrolls to the settingand places the cursor in the setting value box so thesetting may be changed. Hit ENTER after enteringany setting value.

The field labeled "Enter setting value" is used to en-ter a new value for the selected setting. The value ischecked to make sure it is in the allowed range. Theallowed range is specified in the field labeled"Setting range". When a setting valued is changed,the word "Changed" is displayed in the list box nextto the setting.

The user selects the OK button to save the settingchanges.

Save local settings to fileThis item allows the user to write the settings to adisk file. To select this item, either click on it withthe left mouse button or use the ALT-S hot key. Theuser enters a file name (it may include a path also)in the field labeled "Enter file name". Selecting theOK button will save the settings in the specified file.

Model/version numberThis entry displays the model number and PROMfirmware revision that match the settings. To selectthis item, either click on it with the left mouse buttonor use the ALT-M hot key. These numbers shouldmatch any relay to which you wish to send the localsettings. If they do not match, the local settingsdownload will fail.

station/Generator IDThis entry displays the station and generator IDs ofthe relay from which the settings were retrieved.These IDs can be used to identify the relay that thesettings in the file match. This menu item is selectedby clicking on the menu item with the left mousebutton, or using the ALT-G hot key.

Download local settings to dgpThis item will appear on the menu only if the Com-munications access level is Settings.

This item allows the user to transmit all the local set-tings to the DGP system. To select this item, eitherclick on it with the left mouse button or use the ALT-D hot key. Note that if the appropriate jumper is in-stalled, the DGP system will not allow setting changesfrom the PC. See Figure 3-5 of the HARDWARE sec-tion for more information on the jumpers. The localsettings file firmware revision must match the PROM


9-13

version number in the relay or the settings downloadwill fail.

Once this item has been selected, a dialog box is dis-played containing a list box of all the settings beingdownloaded, and a selection in the lower right cor-ner to end the settings changes automatically. Toselect the automatic end of settings change, eitherclick on it with the left mouse button or use the TABkey to highlight it and the space bar to change it. Ifan X appears in the brackets, it has been selected.

To download the settings to the relay, select the OKbutton with the mouse or the ALT-O hot key. If theOK button is selected, another dialog box will be dis-played to confirm the download. To continue thedownload process select the OK button.

End setting changesThis item allows the user to tell the DGP system thatsettings changes are complete and protection shouldbe re-enabled. This item is not necessary if the op-tion to 'end settings changes automatically' was se-lected when the settings were downloaded. To selectthis item, either click on it with the left mouse buttonor use the ALT-E hot key.

Once this item has been selected, a dialog box con-taining the OK and CANCEL buttons is displayed. Ifthe OK button was selected, another dialog box isdisplayed to confirm the ending of setting changes.Selecting the OK button again will end the settingschanges.

Graph oscillography data

The optional program DGP-DATA will be started (ifpresent) if this entry is chosen. This enables the userto graph oscillography data collected and saved ondisk from an applicable DGP model, without leavingDGP-LINK. The DOS path for the DGP-DATA pro-gram needs to be entered. The path is entered fromthe Setup menu (see below) and is stored for lateruse. For more information on DGP-DATA, refer tothe pages describing DGP-DATA at the end of thisSOFTWARE section.

go to DOS

This choice enables the user to temporarily leaveDGP-LINK and go to the DOS prompt to executeDOS commands. Any program or command thatcan run in the available memory can be executed.

To return to the program, type EXIT at the DOSprompt.

Setup

The Setup menu has the following items and hotkeys.

Communication port number ALT-CDial Type ALT-DModem connection time ALT-MRelay parameters ALT-RAdd relay to list ALT-AdElete relay from list ALT-ESet path for DGP-DATA ALT-GMemory available no hot key

Communication port numberThe communication port for the PC is chosen withthis selection. To select this item, either click on itwith the left mouse button or use the ALT-C hot key.Once this item is selected, a dialog box containingthe port number and IRQ number will be displayed.The serial port that is connected to the DGP system,or the modem used to talk to the DGP system, mustbe entered before logging in to the relay. If the portchosen is not COM1(1) or COM2(2), the IRQ num-ber for the port chosen must be entered. Use theTAB key to move between the port and IRQ fieldsand the buttons, or click on the desired field with theleft mouse button.

Once a field has been selected, use the editing keys tochange and/or enter data. When the port and IRQnumbers are correct, select the OK button to save thenumbers.

Dial typeTo select this item, either click on it with the leftmouse button or use the ALT-D hot key. Once thisitem is selected, a dialog box containing the dialingtypes will be displayed. Either tone or pulse dialingcan be chosen. The UP and DOWN ARROW keyswill toggle between the tone and pulse choices. TheTAB key will move between the selected dialing typeand the OK and CANCEL choices in the box. Oncethe dialing type has been chosen, selecting the OKbutton will store the change.

Modem connection timeThis item will change the time-out period for DGP-LINK to wait for the modem to make a connection.To select this item, either click on it with the left


9-14

mouse button or use the ALT-M hot key. The mo-dem connection time can be set for any time up to999 seconds, provided the modem being used willaccommodate that long a time-out period. This set-ting is useful for applications where the modem is setto pick up after a large number of rings, especially ifthe phone system takes a long time to make the ini-tial connection. Once a connection time has beenset, selecting the OK button with the left mouse but-ton or the ALT-O hot key will store the new time-outperiod.

Relay parametersRelay parameters allows the communication parame-ters for a specific relay unit description to bechanged or viewed. An entry in the list must be se-lected first, by clicking on it with the mouse, or usingthe UP and DOWN ARROW keys to highlight theselection and pressing the ENTER key.

Once a relay unit description has been picked, an-other window appears with the phone number,switch code, baud rate, number of stop bits and theparity for the selected relay unit description. Any ofthe entry values may be selected by clicking on it withthe mouse or using the TAB key to move between theitems, and then using the UP and DOWN ARROWkeys to select the value for that item. To exit the dia-log box for that unit description, select either the OKbutton or the CANCEL button. The OK button willaccept the values in the dialog box and store them.Selecting the CANCEL button will exit the dialogbox and will use the values that were already presentwhen the unit description was selected.

To enter or change the phone number, select it byclicking on it with the left mouse button, or use theTAB key to move the cursor to the phone numberbox. The normal text-editing keys may be used toenter or modify the phone number. This is an op-tional item, and should only be filled in if DGP-LINKis using a modem for the unit being described.

To enter or change the switch code, select it by click-ing on it with the left mouse button, or use the TABkey to move the cursor to the switch code box. Thenormal text-editing keys may be used to enter ormodify the switch code. This is an optional item,and should only be filled in if a code-operated switchis being used.

The baud rate must have one of the values selected.The baud rate item can be selected by clicking on it

with the left mouse button, or using the TAB key un-til the selected item is highlighted. The UP andDOWN ARROW keys select the desired value. A spe-cific value can be selected by clicking on it directlywith the left mouse button.

A choice of one or two stop bits must be made forcommunications to work properly. The stop bitsitem can be selected by clicking on it with the leftmouse button, or using the TAB key until the se-lected item is highlighted. The UP and DOWNARROW keys select the desired value. A specificvalue can also be selected by clicking on it directlywith the left mouse button.

Parity must have one of the values selected for com-munications to work properly. The parity item canbe selected by clicking on it with the left mouse but-ton, or using the TAB key until the selected item ishighlighted. The UP and DOWN ARROW keys se-lect the desired value. A specific value can also beselected by clicking on it directly with the left mousebutton.

Add relay to listSelecting this item will enable the user to add a unitdescription and the related values to the list of storedrelay unit descriptions. The user can either movethe mouse cursor to the entry in the menu and clickon the left mouse button, or use the hot key ALT-A toselect this entry. Once the entry has been selected,the user is prompted for a unit description. The de-scription is limited to 20 characters. After the de-scription has been entered, the user can either clickon the OK button with the left mouse button, or usethe ALT-O hot key to accept it.

After the new unit description has been accepted, adialog box will appear with the phone number,switch code, baud rate, stop bits and parity items.Each item can be selected with the TAB or SHIFTTAB key and a value chosen with the UP and DOWNARROW keys, or a value can be chosen by placingthe mouse cursor over the desired value and clickingon the left mouse button.

dElete relay from listThis item allows the user to delete a relay unit de-scription from the configuration file. To select thisitem, either click on it with the left mouse button oruse the ALT-E hot key. Once this item has been se-lected, a dialog box will be displayed containing a list


15

box with all the relay unit descriptions and the OKand CANCEL buttons.

The user selects the desired relay from a list box dis-playing the unit descriptions and logon parameters,by using the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to high-light the desired relay and pressing the ENTER key,or moving the mouse cursor to the desired relay andclicking on it with the left mouse button. Selectingthe OK button with the ALT-O hot key or clicking onit with the left mouse button will mark the unit de-scription for deletion. If the OK button is selected,the user is asked to confirm the deletion of the unitdescription. Selecting the OK button again will de-lete the relay unit description.

set path for DGP-DATADGP-DATA is an optional graphic software for dis-playing the oscillography data captured by the DGP.The DGP-DATA can be started from DGP-LINK fromthe Local functions pull-down menu. The DOS pathmust first be set so DGP-LINK knows where to startthe program from. To set the path, select this menuitem by using the hot key ALT-G, or click on it withthe left mouse button. A dialog box will appear, withspace to enter a path. After entering the path, selectthe OK button to accept the new path. Instructionbook GEK-100697 describes the DGP-DATA software.

memory availableTo display the amount of available memory whileDGP-LINK is running, either click on this menu itemwith the left mouse button, or use the UP or DOWNARROW keys to highlight the menu item, and hitthe ENTER key. There is no hot key for this item.

Exiting DGP-LINKThere are two ways to exit DGP-LINK:

ALT-F4 will produce a dialog box with the exit mes-sage. Selecting the OK button with the mouse, orusing the ALT-O hot key, will exit DGP-LINK.

The ALT key combined with the space bar will pro-duce the System Menu after all menus have beencleared from the screen. Choosing the CLOSE entry,with the mouse or the hot key ALT-C, will produce adialog box with the exit message. Selecting the OKbutton with the mouse or using the ALT-O hot keywill exit DGP-LINK.

NOTE: To exit DGP-LINK, all dialog boxes and listboxes must be cleared from the screen. It isnot necessary to clear all the menus fromthe screen.

Help

This item displays a pull-down menu with a selectionof topics for which help exists. This pull-down menuis different from the other pull-down menus, in thatthe items do not have hot keys associated with them.The user must either click on the mouse, or use theUP and DOWN ARROW keys followed by the ENTERkey, to access the menu items.

08-97

� MULTILIN GE Power Management

UTILITY205 Great Valley ParkwayMalvern, PA 19355

INDUSTRIAL215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioCanada L6E 1B3

internet: http://www.ge.com/edc/pm

dgpman

Documents

dspram dsp

prom dsp board1

dspram dsp

prom dsp board

sq tr en

sq tr en

capram ssp

upper left